492010
137
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/240
Nächste Seite
Operation Manual
MULTIMEDIA NAVIGATION RECEIVER
AVIC-Z140BH
AVIC-X940BT
Notice to all users:
This software requires that the navigation system is
properly connected to your vehicles parking brake and
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may
be required. For more information, please contact your
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at
(800) 421-1404.
Be sure to read Important Information for the User
first!
Important Information for the User includes the
important information that you must understand before
using this navigation system.
English
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these instructions so you will know how to operate your model
properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, keep this document in a
safe place for future reference.
Important
The screens shown in the examples may differ
from actual screens.
Actual screens may be changed without notice
for performance and function improvements.
Introduction
Manual overview 10
How to use this manual 10
Conventions used in this manual 10
Terms used in this manual 10
Notice regarding video viewing 11
Notice regarding DVD-Video viewing 11
Notice regarding MP3 file usage 11
iPod compatibility 11
Map coverage 11
Protecting the LCD panel and screen 12
Notes on internal memory 12
Before removing the vehicle
battery 12
Data subject to erasure 12
Basic operation
Checking part names and functions 14
Protecting your product from theft 16
Removing the detachable
faceplate 16
Attaching the detachable faceplate 16
Adjusting the LCD panel angle 17
Inserting and ejecting a disc 17
Inserting a disc (for AVIC-Z140BH) 17
Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-Z140BH) 18
Inserting a disc (for AVIC-X940BT) 18
Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-X940BT) 18
Inserting and ejecting an SD memory
card 18
Inserting an SD memory card (for AVIC-
Z140BH) 19
Ejecting an SD memory card (for AVIC-
Z140BH) 19
Inserting an SD memory card (for AVIC-
X940BT) 20
Ejecting an SD memory card (for AVIC-
X940BT) 20
Plugging and unplugging a USB storage
device 21
Plugging in a USB storage device 22
Unplugging a USB storage device 22
Connecting and disconnecting an iPod 22
Connecting your iPod 22
Disconnecting your iPod 22
Startup and termination 23
On first-time startup 23
Regular startup 23
A message about the map
database 24
Demonstration images 24
How to use the navigation menu screens
Screen switching over view 26
What you can do on each menu 27
Shortcut Menu 27
Selecting the shortcut 27
Removing a shortcut 28
Operating list screens (e.g. POI list) 28
Operating the on-screen keyboard 28
How to use the map
How to read the map screen 29
Enlarged map of the intersection 30
Display during freeway driving 31
Types of the road stored in the map
database 31
Operating the map screen 31
Changing the scale of the map 31
Switching the map orientation 32
Scrolling the map to the position you
want to see 32
Contents
En
2
Viewing information about a specified
location 32
Using shortcut menus on the map 33
Switching the view mode 34
Eco-friendly driving functions
Checking the eco-friendly driving status 35
Displaying Eco Drive Level guidance 36
Sudden start alert 36
Searching for and selecting a location
The basic flow of creating your route 37
Searching for a location by address 38
Searching for a city name first 38
Finding the location by specifying the
house number 39
Searching by selected city history 40
Setting up a route to your home 40
Searching for Points of Interest (POI) 40
Searching for POIs by preset
categories 41
Searching for a POI directly from the
name of the facilities 41
Searching for a nearby POI 41
Searching for POIs around the
destination 42
Searching for POIs around the city 42
Selecting destination from Favorites 43
Searching for POIs by using the data on the
SD memory card 43
Selecting a location you searched for
recently 44
Searching for a location by coordinates 44
After the location is decided
Setting a route to your destination 45
Displaying multiple routes 45
Checking and modifying the current
route
Displaying the route overview 46
Modifying the route calculation
conditions 46
Items that users can operate 46
Checking the current itinerary 47
Editing waypoints 48
Adding a waypoint 48
Deleting a waypoint 48
Sorting waypoints 49
Canceling the route guidance 49
Registering and editing locations
Storing favorite locations 50
Registering a location by
Favorites 50
Registering a location by scroll
mode 50
Editing registered locations 50
Editing the favorite location in the
list 50
Editing your home 51
Sorting the favorite locations in the
list 51
Deleting a favorite location from the
list 52
Exporting and importing favorite
locations 52
Exporting favorite locations 52
Importing favorite locations 52
Deleting the destination history from the
list 53
Using traffic information
Checking all traffic information 54
Checking traffic information on the
route 55
How to read traffic information on the
map 55
En
3
Contents
Viewing the traffic flow 55
Setting an alternative route to avoid traffic
congestion 56
Checking for traffic congestion
automatically 57
Checking traffic information
manually 57
Selecting traffic information to display 58
Selecting preferred RDS-TMC service
provider manually 58
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth
device
Preparing communication devices 59
Registering your Bluetooth devices 59
Searching for nearby Bluetooth
devices 59
Pairing from your Bluetooth
devices 60
Searching for a specified Bluetooth
device 61
Deleting a registered device 62
Connecting a registered Bluetooth device
manually 62
Setting for priority connecting 63
Using hands-free phoning
Displaying the phone menu 64
Making a phone call 64
Direct dialing 64
Making a call home easily 65
Calling a number in the phone
book 65
Dialing from the history 66
Dialing a favorite location 66
Dialing a facilitys phone number 66
Dialing from the map 67
Receiving a phone call 67
Answering an incoming call 67
Transferring the phone book 68
Changing the order of names in the
phone book 69
Deleting registered contacts 69
Changing the phone settings 69
Editing the device name 69
Editing the password 70
Stopping Bluetooth wave
transmission 70
Echo canceling and noise
reduction 70
Answering a call automatically 70
Setting the automatic rejection
function 71
Clearing memory 71
Updating the Bluetooth wireless
technology software 72
Notes for hands-free phoning 72
Basic operations of the AV source
Displaying the AV operation screen 74
Selecting a source 74
Operating list screens (e.g. iPod list
screen) 74
Switching between the AV operation
screen and the list screen 74
Selecting an item 75
Returning to the previous display 75
Using the radio (FM)
Starting procedure 76
Reading the screen 76
Using the touch panel keys 77
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 77
Operating by hardware buttons 78
Using advanced functions 78
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 78
Tuning in strong signals 78
Contents
En
4
Using the radio (AM)
Starting procedure 80
Reading the screen 80
Using the touch panel keys 81
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 81
Operating by hardware buttons 82
Using advanced functions 82
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 82
Tuning in strong signals 82
HD Radio reception
HD Radio broadcasting 84
Starting procedure 84
Reading the screen 85
Using the touch panel keys 86
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 87
Operating by hardware buttons 87
Switching the display 87
Scrolling the detailed information 88
Storing song information to an iPod (iTunes
Tagging) 88
Using advanced functions 88
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 89
Switching the seek mode 89
Tuning in strong signals 89
Switching the reception mode 89
Playing audio CDs
Starting procedure 91
Reading the screen 91
Using the touch panel keys 92
Operating by hardware buttons 93
Using advanced functions 93
Playing music files on ROM
Starting procedure 94
Reading the screen 94
Using the touch panel keys 96
Operating by hardware buttons 97
Using advanced functions 97
Playing a DVD-Video
Starting procedure 99
Reading the screen 99
Using the touch panel keys 100
Resuming playback (Bookmark) 101
Searching for a specific scene and
starting playback from a specified
time 102
Direct number search 102
Operating the DVD menu 102
Using DVD menu by touch panel
keys 102
Frame-by-frame playback 103
Slow motion playback 103
Operating by hardware buttons 103
Using advanced functions 103
Playing a DivX video
Starting procedure 105
Reading the screen 105
Using the touch panel keys 106
Frame-by-frame playback 107
Slow motion playback 107
Starting playback from a specified
time 108
Operating by hardware buttons 108
Using advanced functions 108
DVD-Video or DivX setup
Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup menu 109
Setting the top-priority languages 109
Setting the angle icon display 109
Setting the aspect ratio 110
Setting the parental lock 110
En
5
Contents
Setting the code number and
level 110
Setting the auto play 111
Setting the subtitle file for DivX 111
Language code chart for DVDs 112
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
Starting procedure 113
Reading the screen 113
Using the touch panel keys (Music) 115
Operating by hardware buttons 116
Using advanced functions 116
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Starting procedure 117
Reading the screen 117
Using the touch panel keys (Video) 118
Searching for a specific scene and
starting playback from a specified
time 119
Operating by hardware buttons 119
Using advanced functions 119
Using an iPod (iPod)
Starting procedure 120
Reading the screen 120
Using the touch panel keys 122
Operating by hardware buttons 124
Starting the video playback 124
Narrowing down a song or video with the
list 124
Operating an application for iPhone from the
navigation system 126
Starting procedure 126
Using the touch panel keys 127
Using the keyboard 127
When using an application not
compatible with Advanced App
Mode 128
Operating the functions from your iPod 128
Starting procedure 128
Using the touch panel keys 129
Playing MusicSphere 130
Starting procedure 130
Reading the screen 130
Using the touch panel keys 130
Using advanced functions 130
Using smartphone applications
Information for the smartphone
compatibility 132
Starting procedure 133
For Android device and BlackBerry
device users 133
For iPhone users 133
Using Pandora® internet radio 134
Reading the screen 134
Using the touch panel keys 135
Operating by hardware buttons 136
Using Aha Radio 136
Reading the screen 136
Using the touch panel keys 137
Functions coupled with Aha Radio and
the navigation system 138
Using the Bluetooth audio player
Starting procedure 139
Reading the screen 139
Using the touch panel keys 141
Operating by hardware buttons 141
Using advanced functions 142
Using the XM tuner
Starting procedure 143
Reading the screen 143
Using the touch panel keys 145
Selecting an XM channel directly 146
Displaying the Radio ID 146
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations 147
Contents
En
6
Selecting a channel from the list 147
Using MyMix function 147
Operating by hardware buttons 148
Using advanced functions 148
Setting the memorized songs 148
Using the SIRIUS tuner
Starting procedure 149
Reading the screen 149
Using the touch panel keys 150
Selecting a SIRIUS channel
directly 151
Display the Radio ID 151
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations 151
Using the song alert function 152
Using the Instant Replay
function 152
Operating by hardware buttons 153
Using advanced functions 153
Setting the memorized songs 153
Using the Game Alert function 153
Displaying Game Information 154
Using AV input
Reading the screen 155
Using AV1 155
Using AV2 155
Using the touch panel keys 155
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)
Starting procedure 156
Reading the screen 156
Using the touch panel keys 157
Customizing preferences
Displaying the screen for navigation
settings 158
Checking the connections of leads 158
Checking sensor learning status and driving
status 159
Clearing status 159
Using the fuel consumption function 160
Inputting the fuel consumption
information for calculating the fuel
cost 160
Calculating the fuel consumption 160
Exporting the data of fuel cost
information 161
Recording your travel history 162
Using the demonstration guidance 162
Registering your home 163
Correcting the current location 163
Changing the eco-function setting 163
Clearing the fuel consumption
information 164
Displaying the screen for map settings 164
Setting the auto-zoom display 165
Setting the detailed city map 165
Setting the barrier graphic for city map 165
Displaying the traffic notification icon 166
Displaying the Bluetooth connection
icon 166
Setting the current street name display 166
Setting the display of icons of favorite
locations 167
Displaying the 3D landmarks 167
Displaying maneuvers 167
Displaying the fuel consumption
information 168
Displaying POI on the map 168
Displaying preinstalled POIs on the
map 168
Displaying the customized POIs 169
Changing the view mode 169
Setting the map color change between day
and night 169
Changing the road color 170
En
7
Contents
Changing the setting of navigation
interruption screen 170
Selecting the Quick Access menu 170
Displaying the screen for system
settings 171
Customizing the regional settings 171
Setting the Volume for Guidance and
Phone 173
Changing the preinstalled splash
screen 174
Changing to the splash screen stored
in the SD memory card 174
Setting for rear view camera 175
Adjusting the response positions of the
touch panel (touch panel
calibration) 175
Setting the illumination color 176
Checking the version information 176
Selecting the video for rear display 177
Adjusting the picture 177
Displaying the screen for AV system
settings 178
Setting video input 1 (AV1) 178
Setting video input 2 (AV2) 179
Changing the wide screen mode 179
Setting the rear output 180
Switching the muting/attenuation
timing 180
Switching the muting/attenuation
level 180
Acquiring/Cataloging iPod music
information 181
Displaying your DivX VOD registration
code 182
Displaying your DivX VOD
deregistration code 182
Selecting the smartphone connection
method 182
Displaying the screen for AV sound
settings 182
Using balance adjustment 183
Using the equalizer 183
Adjusting the equalizer curve
automatically (Auto EQ) 185
Using sonic center control 187
Adjusting loudness 187
Using subwoofer output 188
Using the high pass filter 188
Adjusting source levels 188
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster) 189
Replicating the settings 189
Turning off the screen 189
Operating your navigation system with
voice
To Ensure Safe Driving 190
Basics of the voice operation 190
Flow of the voice operation 190
Starting the voice operation 190
How to use the voice operation 191
Available basic voice commands 192
Basic commands 192
Voice operation for the iPod 192
Voice operation for AV source (other
than iPod) 193
Voice commands related to hands-free
phoning 194
Tips for the voice operation 194
Other functions
Setting the anti-theft function 196
Setting the password 196
Entering the password 196
Deleting the password 196
Forgotten password 196
Returning the navigation system to the
default or factory settings 197
Restoring the default setting 197
Contents
En
8
Returning the navigation system to the
initial state 197
Setting items to be deleted 198
Appendix
Troubleshooting 200
Messages for navigation functions 205
Messages for audio functions 207
Positioning technology 209
Positioning by GPS 209
Positioning by dead reckoning 209
How do GPS and dead reckoning work
together? 209
Handling large errors 210
When positioning by GPS is
impossible 210
Conditions likely to cause noticeable
positioning errors 211
Route setting information 213
Route search specifications 213
Handling and care of discs 213
Built-in drive and care 214
Ambient conditions for playing a
disc 214
Playable discs 214
DVD-Video and CD 214
AVCHD recorded discs 215
Playing DualDisc 215
Dolby Digital 215
Detailed information for playable media 215
Compatibility 215
Media compatibility chart 218
Bluetooth 222
About the SAT RADIO READY Logo 222
HD Radio Technology 222
SD and SDHC logo 223
WMA/WMV 223
DivX 223
AAC 223
Android 223
BlackBerry® 224
Detailed information regarding connected
iPod devices 224
iPod and iPhone 224
iTunes 224
Using app-based connected content 224
Pandora® internet 225
Aha Radio 225
Using the LCD screen correctly 225
Handling the LCD screen 225
Liquid crystal display (LCD)
screen 225
Maintaining the LCD screen 225
LED (light-emitting diode)
backlight 226
Display information 227
Destination Menu 227
Phone Menu 227
Settings Menu 228
Navi Settings menu 228
System Settings menu 229
Map Settings menu 229
Bluetooth Settings menu 230
AV System Settings menu 230
AV Sound Settings menu 231
Glossary 232
Specifications 235
En
9
Contents
Manual overview
Before using this product, be sure to read Im-
portant Information for the User (a separate
manual) which contains warnings, cautions,
and other important information that you
should note.
The screen examples shown in this manual
are the ones for AVIC-Z140BH. If you use a dif-
ferent model, the screens that appear may dif-
fer from the examples in the manual.
How to use this manual
Finding the operation procedure for
what you want to do
When you have decided what you want to do,
you can find the page you need from the Con-
tents.
Finding the operation procedure from
a menu name
If you want to check the meaning of an item
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-
cessary page from the Display information at
the end of the manual.
Glossary
Use the glossary to find the meanings of
terms.
Conventions used in this manual
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read
the following information about the conven-
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with
these conventions will help you greatly as you
learn how to use your new equipment.
! Buttons on your navigation system are de-
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:
e.g.)
HOME button, MODE button.
! Menu items, screen titles, and functional
components are described in bold with
double quotation marks “”:
e.g.)
Destination Menu screen or AV
Source screen
! Touch panel keys that are available on the
screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:
e.g.)
[Destination], [Settings].
! Extra information, alternatives and other
notes are presented in the following for-
mat:
e.g.)
p If the home location has not been stored
yet, set the location first.
! Functions of other keys on the same screen
are indicated with # at the beginning of the
description:
e.g.)
# If you touch [OK], the entry is deleted.
! References are indicated like this:
e.g.)
= For details of the operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 26.
Terms used in this manual
Front display and Rear display
In this manual, the screen that is attached to
the body of this navigation unit will be referred
to as the Front display. Any additional screen
that is commercially available and can be con-
nected to this navigation unit will be referred
to as the Rear display.
Video image
Video image in this manual indicates mov-
ing images of DVD-Video, DivX
®
, iPod, and any
equipment that is connected to this system
with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose
AV equipment.
External storage device (USB, SD)
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card,
microSD card, microSDHC card and USB
memory device are collectively referred to as
the external storage device (USB, SD). If it in-
dicates the USB memory only, it is referred to
as the USB storage device.
En
10
Chapter
01
Introduction
SD memory card
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card,
microSD card and microSDHC card are col-
lectively referred to as the SD memory
card.
Notice regarding video
viewing
Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-
stitute an infringement on the authors rights
as protected by the Copyright Law.
Notice regarding DVD-
Video viewing
This item incorporates copy protection tech-
nology that is protected by U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights of Rovi
Corporation. Reverse engineering and disas-
sembly are prohibited.
Notice regarding MP3 file
usage
Supply of this navigation system conveys only
a license for private, non-commercial use and
does not convey a license nor imply any right
to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-
enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other
media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems, such
as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-
tions. An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
iPod compatibility
This product supports only the following iPod
models and iPod software versions. Others
may not work correctly.
! iPod touch (4th generation): iOS 5.0
! iPod touch (3rd generation): iOS 5.0
! iPod touch (2nd generation): iOS 4.2.1
! iPod touch (1st generation): iOS 3.1.3
! iPod classic 120GB: Ver. 2.0.1
! iPod classic 160GB (2009): Ver. 2.0.4
! iPod classic 80GB: Ver. 1.1.2
! iPod classic 160GB (2007): Ver. 1.1.2
! iPod nano (6th generation): Ver. 1.1
! iPod nano (5th generation): Ver. 1.0.2
! iPod nano (4th generation): Ver. 1.0.4
! iPod nano (3rd generation): Ver. 1.1.3
! iPhone 4S: iOS 5.0
! iPhone 4: iOS 5.0
! iPhone 3GS: iOS 5.0
! iPhone 3G: iOS 4.2.1
! iPhone: iOS 3.1.3
p In this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-
ferred to as iPod.
p When you use this navigation system with
a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-
IU51V) (sold separately), you can control an
iPod compatible with this navigation sys-
tem.
p Operation methods may vary depending on
the iPod models and the software version
of iPod.
p Depending on the software version of the
iPod, it may not be compatible with this
equipment.
For details about iPod compatibility with
this navigation system, refer to the informa-
tion on our website.
Map coverage
For details about the map coverage of this na-
vigation system, refer to the information on
our website.
En
11
Chapter
01
Introduction
Introduction
Protecting the LCD panel
and screen
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the
LCD screen when this product is not being
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight
can result in LCD screen malfunction due
to the resulting high temperatures.
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the
video in the form of spots, colored stripes,
etc.
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be
sure to touch the touch panel keys with
your finger only and gently touch the
screen.
Notes on internal memory
Before removing the vehicle
battery
If the battery is disconnected or discharged,
the memory will be erased and must be repro-
grammed.
p Some data remains. Be sure to read Setting
items to be deleted first.
= For details, refer to Setting items to be
deleted on page 198.
Data subject to erasure
The information is erased by disconnecting
the yellow lead from the battery (or removing
the battery itself).
p Some data remains. Be sure to read Setting
items to be deleted first.
= For details, refer to Setting items to be
deleted on page 198.
En
12
Chapter
01
Introduction
En
13
Chapter
01
Introduction
Introduction
Checking part names and functions
This chapter gives information about the names of the parts and the main features using the buttons.
AVIC-Z140BH (with the LCD panel closed)
7654321
AVIC-Z140BH (with the LCD panel open)
8
9
En
14
Chapter
02
Basic operation
AVIC-X940BT
6 8
7
9
3
a
4
5
c
b
1 button
! Press the
button to activate voice op-
erations.
= For details, refer to Chapter 32.
! Press and hold the
button to switch
the AV source to mute.
To cancel the muting, press and hold it
again.
2 VOL (+/) button
Press to adjust the AV (Audio and Video)
source volume.
3 HOME button
! Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
! Press to switch between the Classic
Menu and the Shortcut Menu while the
Top Menu is displayed.
= For details, refer to What you can do
on each menu on page 27.
! Press and hold to turn off the screen dis-
play.
4 MODE button
! Press to switch between the map screen
and the AV operation screen.
! Press to display the map screen while
the navigation function screen is dis-
played.
! Press and hold to display the Picture
Adjustment screen.
= For details, refer to Adjusting the pic-
ture on page 177.
5 TRK button
Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast
forward, reverse and track search controls.
6 h button
7 LCD screen
8 Disc-loading slot
Insert a disc to play.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting
a disc on page 17.
9 SD card slot
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting
an SD memory card on page 18.
a Multi-control (Volume knob/
/MUTE)
! Rotate to adjust the AV (Audio and
Video) source volume.
En
15
Chapter
02
Basic operation
Basic operation
! Press the center of Multi-control to hear
the route guidance.
! Press and hold the center of Multi-con-
trol to mute the AV (Audio and Video)
source. To cancel the muting, press and
hold it again.
b Detachable faceplate
c
button
Press to remove the detachable faceplate
from the navigation system.
= For details, refer to Removing the detach-
able faceplate on this page.
Protecting your product
from theft
p This function is available for AVIC-X940BT
only.
The detachable faceplate can be detached
from the navigation system to discourage
theft, as described below.
CAUTION
! Do not expose the detachable faceplate to ex-
cessive shock or disassemble it.
! Never grip the buttons tightly or use force
when removing or attaching.
! Keep the detachable faceplate out of reach of
small children to prevent them from putting it
in their mouths.
! After removing the detachable faceplate, keep
it in a safe place so it is not scratched or da-
maged.
! Keep the detachable faceplate out of direct
sunlight and high temperatures.
! When removing or attaching the detachable
faceplate, do so after turning the ignition
switch off (ACC OFF).
Removing the detachable
faceplate
p The navigation system cannot be operated
while the detachable faceplate is removed
from the navigation system.
1 Press and hold the
button, and slide
it down.
When you release your finger, the bottom of
the detachable faceplate separates slightly
from the navigation system.
2 Gently grip the bottom of the detach-
able faceplate and slowly pull it outward.
Detachable faceplate
Attaching the detachable faceplate
1 Slide the detachable faceplate all the
way into the navigation system.
Make sure the detachable faceplate is se-
curely connected to the mounting hooks of
the navigation system.
En
16
Chapter
02
Basic operation
2 Push the lower part of the detachable
faceplate until you hear a click.
If you fail to successfully attach the detach-
able faceplate to the navigation system, try
again but be careful not to force it as the
panel could be damaged.
Adjusting the LCD panel angle
p This function is available for AVIC-Z140BH
only.
WARNING
Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when
opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be
especially cautious of childrens hands and fin-
gers.
CAUTION
Do not open or close the LCD panel by force. This
may cause malfunction.
1 Press the h button.
The Monitor Setup screen appears.
2 Touch
or to adjust the angle.
3 Touch .
p The adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be
memorized and the LCD panel will automa-
tically return to that angle the next time the
LCD panel is opened or closed.
Inserting and ejecting a disc
Inserting a disc (for AVIC-Z140BH)
WARNING
! Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when
opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel.
Be especially cautious of childrens hands
and fingers.
! Do not use with the LCD panel left open. If
LCD panel is left open, it may result in injury
in the event of an accident.
CAUTION
! Do not open or close the LCD panel by force.
This may cause malfunction.
! Do not operate this navigation system until
the LCD panel completely opens or closes. If
this navigation system is operated while the
LCD panel is opening or closing, the LCD
panel may stop at that angle for safety.
! Do not place a glass or a can on the open
LCD panel. Doing so may break this naviga-
tion system.
! Do not insert anything other than a disc into
the disc-loading slot.
1 Press the h button.
The Monitor Setup screen appears.
2 Touch [Open].
The LCD panel opens, and the disc-loading
slot appears.
En
17
Chapter
02
Basic operation
Basic operation
3 Insert a disc into the disc-loading slot.
The disc is loaded, and the LCD panel closes.
Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-Z140BH)
1 Press the h button.
The Monitor Setup screen appears.
2 Touch [Disc Eject].
The LCD panel opens, and the disc is ejected.
3 Remove the disc, and press the h but-
ton.
The LCD panel closes.
Inserting a disc (for AVIC-X940BT)
CAUTION
Do not insert anything other than a disc into the
disc-loading slot.
% Insert a disc into the disc-loading slot.
Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-X940BT)
1 Press the h button.
The touch panel keys for ejecting the media
appear.
2 Touch [Disc Eject].
The disc is ejected.
Inserting and ejecting an
SD memory card
CAUTION
! Ejecting an SD memory card during data
transfer can damage the SD memory card. Be
sure to eject the SD memory card by the pro-
cedure described in this manual.
! If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts
no liability for damages, costs or expenses
arising from data loss or corruption.
! Do not insert anything other than SD memory
cards.
En
18
Chapter
02
Basic operation
p This system is not compatible with Multi
Media Card (MMC).
p Compatibility with all SD memory cards is
not guaranteed.
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some SD memory cards.
Inserting an SD memory card
(for AVIC-Z140BH)
CAUTION
! Do not press the h button when an SD mem-
ory card is not fully inserted. Doing so may da-
mage the card.
! Do not press the h button before an SD mem-
ory card has been completely removed. Doing
so may damage the card.
1 Press the h button.
The Monitor Setup screen appears.
2 Touch [SD Insert].
The LCD panel opens, and the SD card slot ap-
pears.
3 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
Insert it with the label surface facing to the up-
side and press the card until it clicks and com-
pletely locks.
4 Press the h button.
The LCD panel closes.
p If data related to map data, such as custo-
mized POI data, is stored on the SD mem-
ory card, the navigation system restarts.
Ejecting an SD memory card
(for AVIC-Z140BH)
1 Press the h button.
The Monitor Setup screen appears.
2 Touch [Eject SD].
The LCD panel opens.
3 Press the middle of the SD memory
card gently until it clicks.
En
19
Chapter
02
Basic operation
Basic operation
4 Pull the SD memory card out straight.
5 Press the h button.
The LCD panel closes.
p When you eject the SD memory card by
touching [Eject SD], the model information
that you are using will be automatically
stored into the SD memory card.
The utility program AVIC FEEDS will use
this information to recognize the model
that you use.
When the data related to map data is
stored
p This description is for AVIC-Z140BH.
If data related to map data, such as custo-
mized POI data, is stored on the SD memory
card, operating procedures are slightly differ-
ent.
1 Press the h button and then touch
[Eject SD].
2 Touch [Yes].
The navigation system restarts, and then the
LCD panel opens.
3 Eject the SD memory card.
4 Press the h button.
The LCD panel closes.
Inserting an SD memory card
(for AVIC-X940BT)
% Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
Insert the SD memory card with the terminal
contacts facing down, and press the card until
it clicks and locks completely.
p If data related to map data, such as custo-
mized POI data, is stored on the SD mem-
ory card, the navigation system restarts.
Ejecting an SD memory card
(for AVIC-X940BT)
1 Press the h button.
The touch panel keys for ejecting the media
appear.
2 Touch [Eject SD].
A message prompting you to remove the SD
memory card appears.
En
20
Chapter
02
Basic operation
3 Press the middle of the SD memory
card gently until it clicks.
4 Pull the SD memory card out straight.
When the data related to map data is
stored
p This description is for AVIC-X940BT.
If data related to map data, such as custo-
mized POI data, is stored on the SD memory
card, operating procedures are slightly differ-
ent.
1 Press the h button and then touch
[Eject SD].
2 Touch [Yes].
The navigation system restarts, and a message
prompting you to remove the SD memory card
appears.
3 Eject the SD memory card while the
message is displayed.
Eject the SD memory card before touching
[OK].
4 Touch [OK].
The navigation system restarts.
Plugging and unplugging a
USB storage device
CAUTION
! To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility with
all USB mass storage devices and assumes
no responsibility for any loss of data on media
players, smart phones, or other devices while
using this product.
p This navigation system may not achieve op-
timum performance with some USB sto-
rage devices.
p Connection via a USB hub is not possible.
En
21
Chapter
02
Basic operation
Basic operation
Plugging in a USB storage device
% Plug a USB storage device into the USB
and mini-jack connector.
USB and mini-jack connector
USB storage device
Unplugging a USB storage device
% Pull out the USB storage device after
checking that no data is being accessed.
Connecting and
disconnecting an iPod
CAUTION
! To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
! Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility with
all USB mass storage devices and assumes
no responsibility for any loss of data on media
players, smart phones, or other devices while
using this product.
Connecting your iPod
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-
tion system.
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU51V)
(sold separately) is required for connection.
p For details about iPod compatibility with
this navigation system, refer to the informa-
tion on our website.
p Connection via a USB hub is not possible.
1 Check that no USB storage device is
connected.
2 Connect your iPod.
USB and mini-jack con-
nector
USB interface cable for
iPod
Disconnecting your iPod
% Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod
after checking that no data is being ac-
cessed.
En
22
Chapter
02
Basic operation
Startup and termination
1 Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the splash screen comes
on for a few seconds.
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be
sure to touch the touch panel keys with
your finger only and gently touch the
screen.
2 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-
nate the system.
The navigation system is also turned off.
On first-time startup
When you use the navigation system for the
first time, select the language that you want to
use.
1 Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the splash screen comes
on for a few seconds.
2 Touch the language that you want to
use on the screen.
3 Touch the language that you want to
use for the voice guidance.
The navigation system will now restart.
4 Read the disclaimer carefully, checking
its details, and then touch [OK] if you
agree to the conditions.
The map screen appears.
Regular startup
% Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the splash screen comes
on for a few seconds.
p The screen shown will differ depending on
the previous conditions.
p When there is no route, the disclaimer ap-
pears after the navigation system reboots.
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to
the conditions.
p If the anti-theft function is activated, you
must enter your password.
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to
the conditions.
En
23
Chapter
02
Basic operation
Basic operation
A message about the map
database
After you start using this navigation system, a
message related to map data may be dis-
played.
p This message is displayed the first time you
turn on the navigation system each month.
p Touch the message to close it or it will dis-
appear automatically after eight sec-
onds.
Demonstration images
If you do not operate this navigation system
for two minutes, demonstration images are
displayed.
p The demonstration images will not be dis-
played if you drive after mounting this navi-
gation system.
En
24
Chapter
02
Basic operation
En
25
Chapter
02
Basic operation
Basic operation
Screen switching overview
2
5
6
1
1
34
En
26
Chapter
03
How to use the navigation menu screens
What you can do on each
menu
1 Top Menu
Press the HOME button to display the Top
Menu screen.
This is the starting menu to access the desired
screens and operate the various functions.
There are two types of the Top Menu screen.
Classic Menu
Shortcut Menu
p In this manual, Classic Menu will be re-
ferred to as Top Menu.
2 Destination Menu
You can search for your destination on this
menu. You can also check or cancel your set
route from this menu.
3 Phone Menu
You can access the screen that is related to
hands-free phoning.
4 AV operation screen
This is the screen that normally appears when
you play the AV source.
5 Settings Menu
You can access the screen to customize set-
tings.
6 Map screen
You can use this screen to check the current
vehicle position information and route to the
destination.
Shortcut Menu
Registering your favorite menu items in short-
cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis-
tered menu screen by a simple touch on the
Shortcut Menu screen.
Selecting the shortcut
p Up to 15 menu items can be registered in
shortcuts.
1 Press the HOME button repeatedly to
display the Shortcut Menu screen.
p When you use the navigation system for the
first time or no items are set on shortcut, a
message will appear. Touch [Yes] to pro-
ceed to next step.
2 Touch [Shortcut].
The Shortcut selection screen appears.
3 Touch the tab on the right edge or scroll
the bar to display the icon that you want
to set to shortcut.
Scroll bar
4 Touch and hold the icon that you want
to add to shortcut.
En
27
Chapter
03
How to use the navigation menu screens
How to use the navigation menu screens
5 Move the icon to the left side of the
screen, and then release it.
The selected item is added to shortcut.
Removing a shortcut
1 Touch and hold the icon of the shortcut
you want to remove.
2 Move the icon to the right side of the
screen, and then release it.
Operating list screens (e.g.
POI list)
1
54
2
3
6
1 Screen title
2
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls
through the list and allows you to view the re-
maining items.
3
The previous screen returns.
4 Listed items
Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-
row down the options and proceed to the next
operation.
5 Number of possible choices
p If there are 10 000 or more possible
choices, **** is displayed.
6
If all of the characters cannot be displayed
within the displayed area, touching the key to
the right of the item allows you to see remain-
ing characters.
Operating the on-screen
keyboard
1
4
3
5 76
2
8
1 Screen title
The screen title appears.
2 Text box
Displays the characters that are entered. If
there is no text in the box, an informative
guide with text appears.
3 Keyboard
Touch the keys to enter the characters.
4
The previous screen returns.
5 Keys
Switches the on-screen keyboard layout.
6 Sym., Others, 0-9
You can enter other characters of alphabet.
You can also enter text with marks such as [&]
or [+] or numbers.
Touch to toggle the selection.
p Even if you use any of A, Ä, Å, Æ,
the displayed result is the same.
7 OK
Confirms the entry and allows you to proceed
to the next step.
8
Deletes the input text one letter at a time, be-
ginning at the end of the text. Continuing to
touch the key deletes all of the text.
En
28
Chapter
03
How to use the navigation menu screens
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-
come familiar with how information appears on the map.
How to read the map screen
This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.
1
8
9 a
b
2
3
4
c
e
d
5
7
6
f
g
p Information with an asterisk (*) appears
only when the route is set.
p Depending on the conditions and settings,
some items may not be displayed.
1 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-
dance point)*
2 Next direction of travel*
As you get closer to the guidance point, the
color of the item changes to green.
p Touching this item enables you to hear
the next guidance again.
p You can select between display and
non-display.
= For details, refer to Displaying man-
euvers on page 167.
3 Distance to the guidance point*
Shows the distance to the next guidance
point.
p Touching this item enables you to hear
the next guidance again.
4 Second maneuver arrow*
Shows the turning direction after next gui-
dance point and the distance to there.
= For details, refer to Displaying maneu-
vers on page 167.
5 Map control
Touching
displays touch panel keys for
changing the map scale and the map orienta-
tion.
6 Current position
Indicates the current location of your vehicle.
The apex of the triangular mark indicates your
orientation and the display moves automati-
cally as you drive.
p The apex of the triangular mark is the
proper current position of the vehicle.
7 Eco-Meter
Displays a graph comparing the past average
fuel mileage and the average fuel mileage
since the navigation system was last started.
= For details, refer to Displaying the fuel
consumption information on page 168.
En
29
Chapter
04
How to use the map
How to use the map
8 Street name (or city name) that your vehi-
cle is traveling along
= For details, refer to Setting the current
street name display on page 166.
9 Extension tab for the AV information bar
Touching this tab opens the AV information
bar and enables you to briefly view the current
status on the AV source. Touching it again re-
tracts the bar.
a Shortcut to the AV operation screen
The AV source currently selected is shown.
Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-
tion screen of the current source directly.
p Depending on the source currently cho-
sen, an image is displayed.
b Quick Access icon
Displays the Quick Access menu.
= For details, refer to Using shortcut
menus on the map on page 33.
c Map orientation indicator
! When North up is selected, is dis-
played.
! When Heading up is selected,
is
displayed.
p The red arrow indicates north.
= For details, refer to Switching the map or-
ientation on page 32.
d Current route*
The route currently set is highlighted in color
on the map. If a waypoint is set on the route,
the route after the next waypoint is high-
lighted in another color.
e Direction line*
The direction towards your destination (next
waypoint, or the position of a cursor) is indi-
cated with a straight line.
f Multi-Info window
Each touch of Multi-Info window changes the
display information as follows.
! Distance to the destination (or dis-
tance to waypoint)*
! Estimated time of arrival at your des-
tination or waypoint*
The estimated time of arrival is an ideal
value calculated based on the value set
for Average Speed and the actual
driving speed. The estimated time of ar-
rival is only a reference value, and does
not guarantee arrival at that time.
! Travel time to your destination or
waypoint*
g Current time
Meaning of guidance flags
Destination
The checkered flag indicates your
destination.
Waypoint
The blue flags indicate your way-
points.
Guidance point
The next guidance point (next turn-
ing point, etc.) is shown by a yel-
low flag.
Enlarged map of the intersection
When Close Up View in the Map Settings
screen is On, an enlarged map of the inter-
section appears.
= For details, refer to Setting the auto-zoom
display on page 165.
En
30
Chapter
04
How to use the map
Display during freeway driving
In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-
mation is available. The map indicates the re-
commended lane to be in to easily maneuver
the next guidance.
1
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit
numbers and freeway signs may be displayed
in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.
2 3
1 Lane information
2 Freeway exit information
Displays the freeway exit.
3 Freeway signs
These show the road number and give direc-
tional information.
p If the data for these items is not contained
in the built-in memory, the information is
not available even if there are the signs on
the actual road.
Types of the road stored in
the map database
Roads included in the route guidance
Turn by turn routable roads contain full attri-
bute data and can be used for full route gui-
dance. Pioneer navigation will display full
route guidance, including turn-by-turn voice
directions and arrow icons.
Roads without turn-by-turn
instructions
Routable roads (the route displayed and high-
lighted in violet) have only basic data and can
only be used to plot a navigable route. Pioneer
Navigation will only display a navigable route
on the map (only the arrival guidance for the
destination or a waypoint is available). Please
review and obey all local traffic rules along the
highlighted route for your safety.
No turn-by-turn directions will be displayed on
these roads.
Non routable roads (pink color road)
Map display is possible, but it cannot be used
for route calculation. Please review and obey
all local traffic rules along this route. (For your
safety.)
Operating the map screen
Changing the scale of the map
You can change the map scale between 25
yards and 1 000 miles (25 meters and 2 000
kilometers).
1 Display the map screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch on the map screen.
and with the map scale appear.
3 Touch or to change the map
scale.
p If you do not operate the function for a few
seconds, the touch panel keys for map dis-
play control disappear.
# If you touch the direct scale key, the map is
changed to the selected scale directly.
En
31
Chapter
04
How to use the map
How to use the map
Switching the map orientation
You can switch how the map shows your vehi-
cles direction between Heading up and
North up.
! Heading up:
The map display always shows the vehicles
direction as proceeding toward the top of
the screen.
! North up:
The map display always has north at the
top of the screen.
p The map orientation is fixed at North up
when the map scale is 25 miles (50 kilo-
meters) or more.
p The map orientation is fixed at Heading
up when the 3D map screen is displayed.
1 Display the map screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch on the map screen.
or appears.
3 Touch or to switch the vehicles
direction.
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
p If you do not operate the function for a few
seconds, the touch panel keys for map dis-
play control disappear.
Scrolling the map to the
position you want to see
1 Display the map screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch and drag the map in the desired
direction to scroll.
2
1
1 Cursor
2 Distance from the current position
Positioning the cursor to the desired location
results displaying in a brief informational over-
view about the location at the bottom of
screen, with the street name and other infor-
mation for this location. (The information
shown varies depending on the position.)
p The scrolling increment depends on your
dragging length.
# If you touch
, the map returns to the cur-
rent position.
p Pressing MODE button returns the map to
the current position.
Viewing information about a
specified location
An icon appears at registered places (home lo-
cation, specific places, Favorites entries) and
places where there is a POI icon or traffic in-
formation icon. Place the scroll cursor over
the icon to view detailed information.
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cur-
sor to the icon you want to view.
2 Touch
.
The Information List screen appears.
En
32
Chapter
04
How to use the map
3 Touch the item that you want to check
the detailed information.
Information for a specified location appears.
The information shown varies according to the
location. (There may be no information for that
location.)
= For details, refer to Setting the display of
icons of favorite locations on page 167.
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the
map on page 168.
= For details, refer to How to read traffic infor-
mation on the map on page 55.
p Touching [Call] enables you to call the posi-
tion if a telephone number is available.
(Pairing with cellular phone featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology is required.)
= For details, refer to Dialing from the map
on page 67.
Using shortcut menus on the map
Quick Access menu allows you to perform
various tasks, such as route calculation for the
location indicated by the cursor or registering
a location in Favorites, faster than using the
navigation menu.
You can customize Quick Access displayed
on screen. The Quick Access described here
are prepared as the default setting.
= For details, refer to Selecting the Quick Ac-
cess menu on page 170.
p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot
be removed from the Quick Access
menu.
% When the map is displayed, touch
.
Quick Access menu
: Route Options*
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This
item can be selected only during route gui-
dance.
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-
lation and recalculate the current route.
= For details, refer to Modifying the route cal-
culation conditions on page 46.
: Destination*
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the
route to the place specified with the cursor.
: Registration
Register information on the location indicated
by the cursor to Favorites.
= For details, refer to Registering a location by
scroll mode on page 50.
: Vicinity Search
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of
the cursor.
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby
POI on page 41.
: Overlay POI
Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)
on the map.
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the
map on page 168.
: Volume
Displays the Volume Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume for
Guidance and Phone on page 173.
: Contacts
Displays the Contacts List screen.
= For details, refer to Calling a number in the
phone book on page 65.
Close
Hides the Quick Access menu.
En
33
Chapter
04
How to use the map
How to use the map
Switching the view mode
Various types of screen displays can be se-
lected for navigation guidance.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [View Mode].
The View Mode screen appears.
3 Touch the type that you want to set.
You can select the following types:
! 2D View (default):
Displays a normal map (2D map).
! 3D View:
Displays a map with an antenna view (3D
map).
! Street View:
Information on the next four guidance
points closest to the current location ap-
pear in order from top to bottom on the left
side of the screen.
The following information is displayed.
Name of the next route to be taken by
the vehicle
Arrow indicating the direction of the ve-
hicle
Distance to the guidance points
p This mode is available when the route is
set.
! Rear View:
Displays the rear view image on the lef t
side of the screen and the map on the right
side of the screen.
p This mode is available when the rear
view camera setting is set to On.
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view
camera on page 175.
! Eco Graph:
Displays a graph for eco-driving on the left
side of the screen and the map on the right
side of the screen.
= For details, refer to Checking the eco-
friendly driving status on the next
page.
En
34
Chapter
04
How to use the map
This navigation system is equipped with eco-
friendly driving functions that can be used to
estimate whether you are driving in an envir-
onmentally friendly way.
This chapter describes these functions.
! The fuel mileage calculated is based on a
theoretical value determined from vehicle
speed and position information from the
navigation system. The fuel mileage dis-
played is only a reference value, and does
not guarantee the mileage displayed can be
obtained.
! The eco-friendly driving functions are an es-
timate of the real time fuel consumption to
average fuel consumption ratio and is not
an actual value.
! The eco-friendly driving functions and cal-
culations take into consideration the loca-
tion of the GPS position and speed of the
vehicle in determining a value.
Checking the eco-friendly
driving status
This function estimates approximate fuel mile-
age based on your driving, compares that with
your average fuel mileage in the past, and dis-
plays the results in a graph.
The graph appears when the map display is
set to Eco Graph.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [View Mode].
The View Mode screen appears.
3 Touch [Eco Graph].
The Eco Graph screen appears.
2
4
3
1
1 Eco Score
The result of the comparison of your past
average fuel mileage and current average
fuel mileage appears as a value from
0.0 Pts (points) to 10.0 Pts. The higher the
value, the better the fuel mileage when
compared to past route guidance.
The green gauge indicates the current
score, and the gray gauge indicates the
best score to date.
The Eco Score is updated every 5 min-
utes.
p This is not displayed when Eco Score
is set to Off or when no route is set.
2 Best Score
Displays the best score to date.
p This is not displayed when Eco Score
is set to Off or when no route is set.
3 Average fuel mileage comparison graph
Displays a comparison of the average fuel
mileage up to the point the navigation sys-
tem was last stopped (past average fuel
mileage) and the current average fuel mile-
age. The display is updated every 3 sec-
onds. The more the value moves in the
direction of +, the better the fuel mileage.
There are three different graph bars.
! Total
A comparison of the past average fuel
mileage and the average fuel mileage of
the current drive.
!
: Ordinary Road
A comparison of the past average fuel
mileage and the average fuel mileage
for 90 seconds in the past, while the ve-
hicle is driving on an ordinary road.
!
: Freeway
A comparison of the past average fuel
mileage and the average fuel mileage
for 90 seconds in the past, while the ve-
hicle is driving on a freeway.
En
35
Chapter
05
Eco-friendly driving functions
Eco-friendly driving functions
4 Animal icons
The number of displayed animal icons in-
creases or decreases according to the value
of Eco Score.
p This is not displayed when Eco Score
is set to Off or when no route is set.
p Even if you use the Eco Graph function
immediately after you start using the navi-
gation system for the first time,
may be
displayed and the function may not be avail-
able.
= For details, refer to Troubleshooting on page
200.
p The display settings can be changed.
= For details, refer to Changing the eco-func-
tion setting on page 163.
Displaying Eco Drive Level
guidance
This navigation system is equipped with the
Eco Drive Level function that estimates how
well you have driven in an environmentally
friendly way.
The points of Eco Drive Level change ac-
cording to Eco Score when the vehicle
reaches the destination. When a certain num-
ber of points is reached, the level increases
and a message appears.
Tree icon
As the level increases, a tree icon changes
from a young tree to a big tree.
p This is not displayed when Eco Drive
Level is set to Off.
= For details of the operation, refer to Chan-
ging the eco-function setting on page
163.
Sudden start alert
If the speed of the vehicle exceeds 25.5 mph
(41 km/h) within 5 seconds from the time it is
started, a message appears and a warning
sound beeps.
= For details of the operation, refer to Chan-
ging the eco-function setting on page
163.
En
36
Chapter
05
Eco-friendly driving functions
CAUTION
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop in a
safe place and put on the parking brake before
setting your route.
p Some information regarding traffic regula-
tions depends on the time when the route
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-
mation may not correspond with a certain
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually
passes through the location in question.
Also, the information on the traffic regula-
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic
regulations when driving.
The basic flow of creating
your route
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply
the parking brake.
j
2 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 26.
j
3 Select the method of searching for your
destination.
j
4 Enter the information about your destina-
tion to calculate route.
j
5 Confirm the location on the map.
= For details, refer to Setting a route to
your destination on page 45.
j
6 The navigation system calculates the route
to your destination, and then shows the
route on the map.
j
7 Check and decide the route.
= For details, refer to Setting a route to
your destination on page 45.
j
8 Your navigation system sets the route to
your destination, and the map of your sur-
roundings appears.
j
9 Release the parking brake, drive in accor-
dance with navigation guidance.
En
37
Chapter
06
Searching for and selecting a location
Searching for and selecting a location
Searching for a location by
address
The most frequently used function is Ad-
dress, in which the address is specified and
the destination is searched.
You can select the method of searching for a
location by address.
! Searching for a city name first
! Finding the location by specifying the
house number
Searching for a city name first
p Depending on the search results, some
steps may be skipped.
p When you enter characters, the system will
automatically search the database for all
possible options. Only the characters you
enter are active.
p If the search candidates number reaches
20 or less, the screen automatically
changes to the search result screen.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Address].
3 Touch the key next to Country to se-
lect the country.
If the destination is in another country, change
the country setting.
p Once the country has been selected, you
only have to change countries when your
destination is outside of the country you se-
lected.
4 Touch the key next to State and
touch the desired state, province, or terri-
tory on the list.
If the location that you want to search for is in
another state, province, or territory, this
changes the area setting.
p Once the state, province, or territory has
been selected, you only have to change
states, provinces, or territories when your
destination is outside of the state, province,
or territory you selected.
5 Touch [City].
# If you touch [History], the City History List
screen appears, enabling you to search by pre-
viously selected city history.
= For details, refer to Searching by selected
city history on page 40.
6 Enter the city name and then touch
[OK].
The Select City screen appears.
7 Touch the desired city name.
The Street Name screen appears.
# If you touch , the geographic center of the
city appears on the map screen.
En
38
Chapter
06
Searching for and selecting a location
8 Enter the street name and then touch
[OK].
The Street Selection screen appears.
9 Touch the street you want.
10 Enter the house number and then
touch [OK].
The House Number Selection screen ap-
pears.
# If you touch [OK] without entering the house
number, a representative location on the street in
the selected city appears.
11 Touch the desired house number range.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page 45.
Finding the location by
specifying the house number
p Depending on the search results, some
steps may be skipped.
p When you enter characters, the system will
automatically search the database for all
possible options. Only the characters you
enter are active.
p If the search candidates number reaches
20 or less, the screen automatically
changes to the search result screen.
1 Display the Address Search screen.
2 Touch [House#].
The Enter House Number screen appears.
3 Enter the house number and then
touch [OK].
The Enter Street Name screen appears.
4 Enter the street name and then touch
[OK].
The Street Selection screen appears.
5 Touch the street you want.
The Enter City Name screen appears.
6 Enter the city name and then touch
[OK].
The Select City screen appears.
En
39
Chapter
06
Searching for and selecting a location
Searching for and selecting a location
7 Touch the desired city name.
The House Number Selection screen ap-
pears.
If the house number you have entered is not
found, a message appears. In that case, all
house number ranges are listed after touching
[Yes].
# If you touch , the geographic center of the
city appears on the map screen.
8 Touch the desired house number range.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page 45.
Searching by selected city history
You can search the cities from the history that
you have searched by entering the name with
the keyboard and selected by Address, POI
or Favorites.
p The history can store up to 50 cities.
p The cities are listed in order of the most re-
cent search.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Address].
The Address Search screen appears.
3 Touch [History].
The City History List screen appears.
4 Touch the desired city name.
The Street Name screen appears.
# If you touch , the geographic center of the
city appears on the map screen.
5 Enter the street name and then touch
[OK].
The Street Selection screen appears.
6 Touch the street you want.
The Enter House Number screen appears.
p If the selected street has only one matching
location, the searched location appears on
the map screen.
7 Enter the house number and then
touch [OK].
The House Number Selection screen ap-
pears.
# If you touch [OK] without entering the house
number, a representative location on the street in
the selected city appears.
8 Touch the desired house number range.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page
45.
Setting up a route to your
home
If your home location is stored, the route to
your home can be calculated by touching a
single key.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Return Home].
p If you have not registered your home loca-
tion, a message appears. Touch [Register]
to start registration.
= For details, refer to Registering your
home on page 163.
Searching for Points of
Interest (POI)
Information about various facilities (Points Of
Interest POI), such as gas stations, parking
lots or restaurants, is available. You can
search for a POI by selecting the category (or
entering the POI Name).
En
40
Chapter
06
Searching for and selecting a location
Searching for POIs by preset
categories
You can search for POIs with a single touch
from the preset category.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [POI].
3 Touch the desired category.
Preset categories
The POI List screen appears.
4 Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page 45.
Searching for a POI directly
from the name of the facilities
p If the search candidates number reaches
20 or less, the screen automatically
changes to the search result screen.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [POI].
The POI Search screen appears.
3 Touch [Spell Name].
4 Enter the POI name and then touch
[OK].
The POI List screen appears.
# If you change the region to search, touch the
state code key and display the State List screen
to change the setting.
State code key
If the destination is in another country, touch
[Country] to change the country setting when
the State List screen is displayed.
p Once the region has been selected, you
only have to change it when your destina-
tion is outside of the region you selected.
5 Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
# If you touch [Sort], the order of POI can be
sorted.
p Current order is indicated on the upper
right of the screen.
!
:
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
!
:
Sorts the items in the list in order by degree
of consistency with the entered text.
!
:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page 45.
Searching for a nearby POI
You can search for POIs in your surroundings.
p Up to 300 POIs within a 100 miles (160 kilo-
meters) radius of the vehicle position are
listed in order by distance.
En
41
Chapter
06
Searching for and selecting a location
Searching for and selecting a location
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [POI].
The POI Search screen appears.
3 Touch [Near Me].
POIs are divided into several categories.
4 Touch the category you want.
The POI List screen appears.
p If there are more detailed categories within
the selected category, repeat this step as
many times as necessary.
5 Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page 45.
Searching for POIs around the
destination
p This function is available when the route is
set.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [POI].
The POI Search screen appears.
3 Touch [Near Destination].
POIs are divided into several categories.
4 Touch the category you want.
The POI List screen appears.
p If there are more detailed categories within
the selected category, repeat this step as
many times as necessary.
5 Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page 45.
Searching for POIs around the city
You can search for POIs around a specified
city.
p If the search candidates number reaches
20 or less, the screen automatically
changes to the search result screen.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [POI].
The POI Search screen appears.
3 Touch [Around City].
4 Enter the city name and then touch
[OK].
The Select City screen appears.
# If you change the region to search, touch the
state code key and display the State List screen
to change the setting.
State code key
If the destination is in another country, touch
[Country] to change the country setting when
the State List screen is displayed.
p Once the region has been selected, you
only have to change it when your destina-
tion is outside of the region you selected.
# If you touch [History], the City History List
screen appears, enabling you to search by pre-
viously selected city history.
= For details, refer to Searching by selected
city history on page 40.
5 Touch the desired city name.
POIs are divided into several categories.
# If you touch , the geographic center of the
city appears on the map screen.
En
42
Chapter
06
Searching for and selecting a location
6 Touch the category you want.
The POI List screen appears.
p If there are more detailed categories within
the selected category, repeat this step as
many times as necessary.
7 Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page 45.
How to read the POI List screen
The following information is displayed on the
POI List screen.
12 3
1 Facility name
2 Facility address
3 Distance from the position that the search
starts
p If you touch , detailed information of the
facility appears.
Selecting destination from
Favorites
Storing locations you visit frequently saves
time and effort.
Selecting an item from the list provides an
easy way to specify the position.
p This function is not available if no locations
have been registered in Favorites.
= For details, refer to Storing favorite locations
on page 50.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Favorites].
3 Touch the entry you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on page
45.
Searching for POIs by using
the data on the SD memory
card
Creating a customized POI is possible by
using the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is
available separately, on your PC. (AVIC FEEDS
will be available on our website.) Storing the
customized POI properly and inserting the SD
memory card enables the system to use the
data for searches.
1 Store the item into the SD memory card
by using the AVIC FEEDS.
2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
3 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
En
43
Chapter
06
Searching for and selecting a location
Searching for and selecting a location
4 Touch [AVIC FEEDS].
The Select POI screen appears.
5 Touch the item you want.
6 Touch the POI you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on the next
page.
Selecting a location you
searched for recently
The places that you have set as destination or
waypoint in the past are automatically stored
in History.
p If no location is stored in Destination His-
tory, you cannot select [History]. (If you
perform a route calculation, you can select
[History].)
p History can store up to 100 locations. If
the entries reach the maximum, the new
entr y overwrites the oldest one.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [History].
3 Touch the entry you want.
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on the next
page.
Searching for a location by
coordinates
Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints
the location.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Coordinates].
3 Touch [East] or [West], and then enter
the longitude.
To enter W 50°12.5 for example, touch
[West], [0], [5], [0], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].
4 Touch [North] or [South], and then
enter the latitude.
To enter N 5°12.5 for example, touch [North],
[0], [5], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].
5 Touch [OK].
The searched location appears on the map
screen.
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-
ting a route to your destination on the next
page.
En
44
Chapter
06
Searching for and selecting a location
Setting a route to your
destination
1 Search for a location.
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.
After searching for the destination, the Loca-
tion confirmation screen appears.
2 Touch [OK].
Location confirmation screen
The destination is set, and then route calcula-
tion starts.
When the route calculation is completed,
Route confirmation screen appears.
# If you press the MODE button during route
calculation, the calculation is canceled and the
map screen appears.
# If you touch [Scroll], the map display is chan-
ged to the scroll mode. In the scroll mode, you
can display the location more precisely to register
it, or make settings.
# If you touch [Waypoint], the location is added
to the Waypoints List screen.
p If a destination is not set, [ Waypoint] is not
available.
3 Touch [OK].
Route confirmation screen
1 23 4
Sets the displayed route as your route, and
starts the route guidance.
1 Travel time to your destination
2 Distance to the destination
3 Estimated fuel cost to your destination
= For details, refer to Inputting the fuel
consumption information for calculating
the fuel cost on page 160.
4 Route calculation condition
# If you touch
, the message confirming
whether to cancel the calculated route appears.
If you touch [Yes], the calculated route is can-
celed and the map screen appears.
2
3
1
4
1 Multiple Route
= For details, refer to Displaying multiple
routes on this page.
2 Options
= For details, refer to Modifying the route
calculation conditions on the next page.
3 Profile
= For details, refer to Checking the current
itinerary on page 47.
4 Waypoints
= For details, refer to Editing waypoints on
page 48.
Displaying multiple routes
You can select a desired route from multiple
route options. Calculated routes are shown in
different colors.
p If you set waypoints, you cannot display
multiple routes.
1 Touch [Multiple Route] on the Route
confirmation screen.
Multiple route options appear.
2 Touch
to .
Another route is displayed.
3 Touch [OK].
Route confirmation screen appears.
En
45
Chapter
07
After the location is decided
After the location is decided
Displaying the route overview
p Route Overview is active only when the
route is set.
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Destination].
The Destination Menu screen appears.
3 Touch [Route Overview].
2
3
1
1 Options
= For details, refer to Modifying the route
calculation conditions on this page.
2 Profile
= For details, refer to Checking the current
itinerary on the next page.
3 Waypoints
= For details, refer to Editing waypoints on
page 48.
4 Touch [OK].
Modifying the route
calculation conditions
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-
lation and recalculate the current route.
1 Display the Route Overview screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the route
overview on this page.
2 Touch [Options].
3 Touch the desired items to change the
route calculation conditions and then
touch [OK].
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-
firmation screen appears.
Items that users can operate
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that
these are default or factory settings.
Route Condition
This setting controls how the route should be
calculated by taking into account the time, dis-
tance or main road.
Determines which condition takes priority for
route calculation.
Fast*:
Calculates a route with the shortest travel time
to your destination as a priority.
Short:
Calculates a route with the shortest distance
to your destination as a priority.
Main Road:
Calculates a route that passes major arterial
roads as a priority.
En
46
Chapter
08
Checking and modifying the current route
Avoid Toll Road
This setting controls whether toll roads (in-
cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-
count.
Off*:
Calculates a route that may include toll roads
(including toll areas).
On:
Calculates a route that avoids toll roads (in-
cluding toll areas).
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes toll roads even if On is selected.
Avoid Ferry
This setting controls whether ferry crossings
should be taken into account.
Off*:
Calculates a route that may include ferries.
On:
Calculates a route that avoids ferries.
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes ferries even if On is selected.
Avoid Freeway
This setting controls whether freeways may be
included in the route calculation.
Off*:
Calculates a route that may include freeways.
On:
Calculates a route that avoids freeways.
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes freeways even if On is selected.
Time restrictions
This setting controls whether streets or
bridges that have traffic restrictions during a
certain time should be taken into account.
p If you want to set your route to avoid raised
draw bridges, select On.
On*:
Calculates a route while avoiding streets or
bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-
tain time.
Off:
Calculates a route while ignoring traffic re-
strictions.
p The system may calculate a route that in-
cludes streets or bridges that are subject to
traffic restrictions during a certain time
even if On is selected.
CAUTION
If the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-
gation system cannot consider traffic regulations
correctly. Set the time difference correctly.
= For details, refer to Setting the time difference
on page 172.
Learning Route
The system learns the travel history of your ve-
hicle for each road.
This setting controls whether or not the travel
history should be taken into account.
On*:
Calculates a route with the travel history taken
into account.
Off:
Calculates a route without the travel history
taken into account.
Clear:
Clears the current travel history.
Checking the current itinerary
You can check the route details.
1 Display the Route Overview screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the route
overview on the previous page.
2 Touch [Profile].
The Route Profile screen appears.
En
47
Chapter
08
Checking and modifying the current route
Checking and modifying the current route
Editing waypoi nts
You can edit waypoints (locations you want to
visit on the way to your destination) and recal-
culate the route so that it passes through
these locations.
Adding a waypoint
Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints
and final destination can be sorted automati-
cally or manually.
1 Display the Route Overview screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the route
overview on page 46.
2 Touch [Waypoints].
The Waypoints List screen appears.
3 Touch [Add].
The Select Search method screen appears.
4 Search for a location.
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.
5 Touch [OK].
6 Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List
screen.
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-
firmation screen appears.
p If you set waypoints, you cannot display
multiple routes.
Deleting a waypoint
You can delete waypoints from the route and
then recalculate the route. (You can delete
successive waypoints.)
1 Display the Route Overview screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the route
overview on page 46.
2 Touch [Waypoints].
The Waypoints List screen appears.
3 Touch [Delete] next to the waypoint
that you want to delete.
The touched waypoint will be deleted from the
list.
4 Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List
screen.
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-
firmation screen appears.
5 Touch [OK].
The map of the current position appears.
En
48
Chapter
08
Checking and modifying the current route
Sorting waypoints
You can sort waypoints and recalculate the
route.
p You cannot sort waypoints that you have al-
ready passed.
1 Display the Route Overview screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the route
overview on page 46.
2 Touch [Waypoints].
The Waypoints List screen appears.
3 Touch [Sort].
The Sort Waypoints screen appears.
4 Touch the waypoint or destination.
Put them in the desired order.
# If you touch [Automatic], the destination and
waypoints are sorted in the order of a nearest
waypoint from the current location in the direct
antenna path.
# If you touch [Clear], waypoint sort is canceled.
5 Touch [OK].
The Waypoints List screen appears.
6 Touch [OK] on the Waypoints List
screen.
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-
firmation screen appears.
7 Touch [OK].
The map of the current position appears.
Canceling the route guidance
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-
tion, follow the steps below to cancel the route
guidance.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Cancel Route].
A message confirming the cancellation of the
current route appears.
3 Touch [Yes].
The current route is deleted, and a map of
your surroundings reappears.
# If you touch [Skip], the next waypoint is
skipped and a new route is calculated. All other
waypoints remain.
When the route calculation is completed, Route
confirmation screen appears.
p [Skip] is available only when a waypoint is
set.
# If you touch [No], the previous screen returns
without deleting the route.
En
49
Chapter
08
Checking and modifying the current route
Checking and modifying the current route
Storing favorite locations
Storing your favorite locations as Favorites
provides you with the opportunity to save the
time and effort of re-entering this information.
Stored items can be made available on Fa-
vorites later.
Registering a location by
Favorites
Favorites can store up to 400 locations.
Home location is counted as one of the items
in Favorites.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Favorites].
The Favorites screen appears.
3 Touch [Add].
The Select Search method screen appears.
4 Search for a location.
= For details about the search methods, refer
to Chapter 6.
5 When the map of the location you
want to register is displayed, touch [OK].
The location is registered, and then the Edit
Favorite screen appears.
= For details, refer to Editing the favorite loca-
tion in the list on this page.
6 Touch [OK].
The registration is complete.
Registering a location by scroll
mode
p This function is available when Registra-
tion is set in the Quick Access menu.
= For details, refer to Selecting the Quick
Access menu on page 170.
1 Touch and drag the screen to scroll the
map to the position that you want to regis-
ter.
2 Touch to display the Quick Access
menu.
3 Touch
.
The location is registered, and then the Edit
Favorite screen appears.
= For details, refer to Editing the favorite loca-
tion in the list on this page.
4 Touch [OK].
The registration is complete.
Editing registered locations
Editing the favorite location in
the list
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Favorites].
The Favorites screen appears.
3 Touch
next to the location that you
want to edit.
The Edit Favorite screen appears.
4 Touch the item that you want to
change the setting.
2
3
1
4
En
50
Chapter
09
Registering and editing locations
1 Name
You can enter the desired name.
p Up to 17 characters can be input for the
name.
2 Phone#
You can edit the registered phone number.
To dial the number, touch [Call].
The maximum digits you can enter for the
phone number is 15.
3 Icon
You can change the symbol displayed on
the map and Favorites.
4 Modify Location
You can change the registered location by
scrolling the map.
5 Touch [OK].
The registration is complete.
Editing your home
When you have already registered your home,
you can edit the information of your home.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Favorites].
p Home location is displayed on the top of
the list.
3 Touch next to the home location.
The Edit Favorite screen appears.
4 Touch the item that you want to
change the setting.
1
2
1 Phone#
To dial the number, touch [Call].
2 Modify Location
You can change the registered location by
scrolling the map.
p For home information, [Name] and [Icon]
are not editable.
5 Touch [OK].
The registration is complete.
Sorting the favorite locations
in the list
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Favorites].
The Favorites screen appears.
3 Touch [Sort].
Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort
order.
p Current order is indicated on the upper
right of the screen.
!
:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-
cently used items.
!
:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
!
:
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
En
51
Chapter
09
Registering and editing locations
Registering and editing locations
Deleting a favorite location
from the list
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Favorites].
The Favorites screen appears.
3 Touch [Delete].
4 Select the location you want to delete.
A check mark appears next to the selected lo-
cation.
# If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If
you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].
5 Touch [Delete].
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
6 Touch [Yes].
The data you selected is deleted.
# If you touch [No], the deletion is canceled.
Exporting and importing
favorite locations
Exporting favorite locations
You can export the Favorites data to an SD
memory card for editing by using the utility
program AVIC FEEDS which is available sepa-
rately, on your PC.
p If there is previous data in the SD memory
card, the data is overwritten with new data.
1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
2 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
3 Touch [Favorites].
The Favorites screen appears.
4 Touch
.
Data export starts.
After the data is exported, the completion mes-
sage appears.
5 Touch [OK].
The Favorites screen appears.
Importing favorite locations
You can import the locations that you have edi-
ted on the utility program AVIC FEEDS to Fa-
vorites.
p When a location that is already registered
in Favorites is imported, the location is
overwritten.
1 Store the item into the SD memory card
by using the AVIC FEEDS.
En
52
Chapter
09
Registering and editing locations
2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
3 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
4 Touch [Favorites].
The Favorites screen appears.
5 Touch
.
The message confirming whether to replace
the stored items appears.
6 Touch [Yes].
Data import starts.
After importing the data is finished, the Fa-
vorites screen appears.
Deleting the destination
history from the list
Items in History can be deleted. All entries
in History can be deleted at once.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [History].
The Destination History List screen ap-
pears.
3 Touch [Delete].
The Delete from History screen appears.
4 Select the location you want to delete.
A check mark appears next to the selected lo-
cation.
# If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If
you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].
5 Touch [Delete].
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
6 Touch [Yes].
The data you selected is deleted.
# If you touch [No], the deletion is canceled.
En
53
Chapter
09
Registering and editing locations
Registering and editing locations
p Please note that use of the traffic informa-
tion function on AVIC-X940BT will require
that a separately sold Traffic tuner (ND-
TMC10) be connected.
You can check real-time traffic information
transmitted by the Traffic Management Chan-
nel (TMC) of the receive data services (RDS)
on the screen. Such traffic information is up-
dated periodically. When the navigation sys-
tem receives updated traffic information, the
navigation system will overlay the traffic infor-
mation on your map and also display detailed
text information when available. When you are
traveling along a route and there is traffic in-
formation on your current route, the system
will detect it and ask you if you would like to
be rerouted, or suggest another route automa-
tically.
p When used in North America, this product
receives traffic information provided by
Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc.
© Clear Channel Broadcasting, Inc.
p The system acquires the traffic information
up to 100 miles in radius from the vehicle
position. (If there is a lot of traffic informa-
tion around your vehicle, the radius will be
shorter than 100 miles.)
p The navigation system provides the follow-
ing functions by using the information
from RDS-TMC service:
! Displaying a list of traffic information
! Displaying traffic information on a map
! Suggesting a route to avoid traffic con-
gestion by using traffic information
p The term traffic congestion in this section
indicates the following types of traffic infor-
mation: stop and go, stopped traffic,
closed/blocked roads. This information is
always taken into consideration when
checking your route, and the information
related with these events cannot be turned
off. If you select other traffic information in
Traffic Settings, the information can be
displayed in a list or on a map.
= For details, refer to Selecting traffic infor-
mation to display on page 58.
Checking all traffic
information
Traffic information except traffic flow informa-
tion is listed on screen. This allows you to
check how many traffic incidents have oc-
curred, their location and their distance from
your current position.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Traffic].
The Traffic Menu screen appears.
3 Touch [Traffic Events].
The Traffic Event List screen appears.
The list with received traffic information is
shown.
4 Select an incident you want to view in
detail.
The details of the selected incident are dis-
played.
p Touching an incident you want to see allows
you to view the detailed information of the
incident. If the information cannot be dis-
played on one screen, touch
or to view
the remaining information.
p Touching
allows you to check the loca-
tion on a map. (Traffic information without
positional information cannot be checked
on a map.)
# If you touch [Sort], the traffic information can
be sorted.
Each time you touch the key changes the setting.
!
:
You can sort the traffic information by dis-
tance from your current position.
En
54
Chapter
10
Using traffic information
When you touch [Traffic Events], the list
displayed will be sorted according to the lin-
ear distance from the vehicle position to the
traffic information.
When you touch [Traffic on Route], the list
displayed will be sorted according to the
distance from the vehicle position to the
traffic information.
!
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-
betical order.
!
:
You can sort the traffic information accord-
ing to the incident.
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-
dents, road works and others.
Current order is indicated on the upper right of
the screen.
# If you touch [Refresh] while new traffic infor-
mation is received, current information is chan-
ged and old information is removed. The traffic
information list is updated to reflect the new si-
tuation.
5 Touch .
The previous screen returns.
Checking traffic
information on the route
All traffic information on the current route is
displayed on screen in a list.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Traffic].
The Traffic Menu screen appears.
3 Touch [Traffic on Route].
The Traffic on Route screen appears.
The method for checking the content dis-
played on the screen is the same as Traffic
Event List screen.
= For details, refer to Checking all traffic infor-
mation on the previous page.
How to read traffic
information on the map
The traffic event information displayed on the
map is as follows.
p A line is displayed only when the map scale
is 2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.
p Icons appear only when the scale on the
map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower. If the
scale is changed, the icons are resized ac-
cording to the selected scale.
Traffic event icon
! with yellow line:
Stop-and-go traffic
!
with red line:
Stopped traffic
!
with black line:
Closed/blocked roads
!
etc.:
Accidents, constructions, etc.
p For meanings of other icons, check them
the Traffic Type Settings screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Select-
ing traffic information to display on page
58.
Viewing the traffic flow
All traffic flow information is displayed on
screen in a list.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Traffic].
The Traffic Menu screen appears.
En
55
Chapter
10
Using traffic information
Using traffic information
3 Touch [Traffic Flow].
A list with traffic flow information that has
been received is shown. The list is sorted by
distance from your current position.
Places (street names) where incidents have
occurred are displayed on the list.
4 Select an incident you want to view in
detail.
The details of the selected incident are dis-
played.
p Touching an incident you want to see allows
you to view the detailed information of the
incident. If the information cannot be dis-
played on one screen, touch
or to view
the remaining information.
p Touching
allows you to check the loca-
tion on a map. (Traffic information without
positional information cannot be checked
on a map.)
# If you touch [Sort], the traffic information can
be sorted.
Each time you touch the key changes the setting.
!
:
You can sort the traffic information by the
linear distance from your current position.
!
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-
betical order.
!
:
You can sort the traffic information by the
average speed.
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-
dents, road works and others.
Current order is indicated on the upper right of
the screen.
# If you touch [Refresh] while new traffic infor-
mation is received, current information is chan-
ged and old information is removed. The traffic
information list is updated to reflect the new si-
tuation.
# Touch
.
The traffic event information displayed on the
map is as follows.
Traffic flow icon and line
! Red: average speed in this area is slower
than 15 mph (24 km/h)
! Yellow: average speed in this area is be-
tween 15 mph to 45 mph (24 km/h to 72 km/
h)
! Green: average speed in this area is faster
than 45 mph (72 km/h) (An icon without a
line will be displayed)
Setting an alternative route
to avoid traffic congestion
The navigation system checks at regular inter-
vals whether or not there is the traffic informa-
tion on your route. If the navigation system
detects any traffic congestion on your current
route, the system tries to find a better route in
the background.
p The following types of traffic incidents on
the route will be checked: stop and go,
stopped traffic and closed/blocked roads
except for closed freeway exits/entrances.
En
56
Chapter
10
Using traffic information
Checking for traffic congestion
automatically
If there is information about traffic congestion
on your current route and if an alternative
route can be found, the navigation system will
recommend a new alternative route automati-
cally. In such a case, the following screen will
appear.
12
1 Difference in distance and travel time between
the existing route and new route.
2 Distance from the current position of your ve-
hicle to the point of entry into the new route.
p There is no action if the system cannot find
any traffic congestion information on your
route or the system cannot find an alterna-
tive.
1 Touch [New].
The recommended route is displayed on the
screen.
# If you touch [Current] while the recom-
mended route is displayed, the screen switches
to the current route display.
2 Touch [OK].
The displayed route is set.
p When no selection is made, the screen re-
turns to the previous screen.
Checking traffic information
manually
Touching the notification icon on the map
screen allows you to check traffic information
on your route while the icon is displayed. The
notification icon is only displayed on the navi-
gation map screen if there is any traffic infor-
mation on your route.
p The notification icon is not available if your
vehicle deviates from the route.
1 Set [Show Traffic Incident] to View.
= For details, refer to Displaying the traffic no-
tification icon on page 166.
2 Display the map screen.
The icon appears when the system acquires
traffic information on the current route.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
3 Touch the notification icon while the
icon is displayed.
Notification icon
Traffic information on the current route is dis-
played on the map screen.
4 Touch [Diversion] to search for an alter-
native route.
After touching [Diversion], the route is recal-
culated taking all traffic congestion on your
current route into account.
p [Diversion] will be available only when the
system can find traffic congestion.
En
57
Chapter
10
Using traffic information
Using traffic information
p Notification icon shows the nearest traffic
information on the route. However, if you
touch [Diversion], the route is recalculated
by taking into account not only this infor-
mation, but also all traffic congestion infor-
mation on the route.
= For details, refer to Checking for traffic con-
gestion automatically on the previous page.
# If you touch [List], the Traffic on Route
screen appears.
# If you touch
, the message disappears and
the map screen returns.
Selecting traffic
information to display
There are different types of traffic information
that can be received via the RDS-TMC service,
and you can select which types will be incor-
porated and displayed on your navigation sys-
tem.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Traffic].
The Traffic Menu screen appears.
3 Touch [Traffic Settings].
The Traffic Settings screen appears.
4 Touch [Displayed Traffic Info].
The Traffic Type Settings screen appears.
5 Touch the traffic information item to
display.
A check mark appears next to the selected
traffic information.
# If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If
you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].
6 Touch [OK].
The selected traffic information icon is added
to the screen.
7 Touch [OK].
Selecting preferred RDS-TMC
service provider manually
A default preferred TMC service provider for
each country has been set. The navigation sys-
tem tunes to the radio station with good recep-
tion among the preferred RDS-TMC service
providers. If you want to set another preferred
RDS-TMC service provider, you can manually
select one from available RDS-TMC service
providers.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Traffic].
The Traffic Menu screen appears.
3 Touch [TMC Provider Selection].
4 Touch the desired service provider on
the list.
After touching a service provider, the system
starts tuning to the selected RDS-TMC service
provider. When the tuning is successful, the
system returns to the map display.
En
58
Chapter
10
Using traffic information
If your devices feature Bluetooth
®
technology,
this navigation system can be connected to
your devices wirelessly. This section describes
how to set up a Bluetooth connection.
For details about the connectivity with the de-
vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology,
refer to the information on our website.
Preparing communication
devices
This navigation system has a built-in function
to use devices featuring Bluetooth wireless
technology.
= For details, refer to Notes for hands-free
phoning on page 72.
You can register and use devices that feature
the following profiles with this navigation sys-
tem.
! HFP (Hands Free Profile)
! A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Pro-
file)
p If the registered device features both HFP
and A2DP, the hands-free connection is
made and then the Bluetooth audio con-
nection is made.
If the registered device features either pro-
file, the corresponding connection is made.
p When the navigation system is turned off,
the Bluetooth connection is also discon-
nected. When the system restarts, the sys-
tem automatically attempts to reconnect
the previously-connected device. Even
when the connection is severed for some
reason, the system automatically recon-
nects the specified device (except when the
connection is severed due to device oper-
ation).
Registering your Bluetooth
devices
You need to register your devices featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology when you con-
nect it for the first time. A total of 5 devices
can be registered. Three registration methods
are available:
! Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices
! Pairing from your Bluetooth devices
! Searching for a specified Bluetooth device
p If you try to register more than 5 devices,
the system will ask you to select one of the
registered devices to delete.
= For details, refer to Deleting a registered
device on page 62.
Searching for nearby Bluetooth
devices
The system searches for available Bluetooth
devices near the navigation system, displays
them in a list, and registers them for connec-
tion.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices.
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless
technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your devices.
2 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
3 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
4 Touch [Registration].
The Nearby Device List screen appears.
The system searches for Bluetooth devices
waiting for the connection and displays them
in the list if a device is found.
p Up to 30 devices will be listed in the order
that the devices are found.
En
59
Chapter
11
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device
5 Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-
pears in the list.
p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that
you want to connect, check that the device
is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology connection.
6 Touch the Bluetooth device name you
want to register.
# If you touch [Search Again], the system starts
searching for Bluetooth devices waiting for con-
nection, and displays them in the list format
when any devices are detected.
7 Enter the password (the default pass-
word is 1111) using the Bluetooth de-
vice.
Enter the password while the message Please
follow the instructions on your mobile
phone. appears.
The device is registered in the navigation sys-
tem.
After the device is successfully registered, the
Bluetooth connection is established from the
navigation system.
Pairing from your Bluetooth
devices
You can register the Bluetooth device by set-
ting the navigation system to standby mode
and requesting connection from the Bluetooth
device.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices.
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless
technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your devices.
2 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
3 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
4 Touch [Registration].
The Nearby Device List screen appears.
5 Touch [Register from mobile phone].
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth
wireless technology connection.
En
60
Chapter
11
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device
6 Register the navigation system on your
Bluetooth device.
If your device asks you to enter a password,
enter the password of the navigation system.
When the device is successfully registered,
the connection settings are made from the de-
vice.
p If registration fails, repeat the procedure
from the beginning.
Searching for a specified
Bluetooth device
If you cannot connect your Bluetooth device
using the nearby device search and if your
Bluetooth device is found in the list, try the fol-
lowing method.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices.
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless
technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your devices.
2 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
3 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
4 Touch [Registration].
The Nearby Device List screen appears.
5 Touch [Select specific devices].
The Select specific devices screen appears.
6 Touch the Bluetooth device name to be
connected.
The system searches for Bluetooth devices
waiting for the connection and displays them
in the list if a device is found.
p If you cannot find the desired device name
on the list, touch [Other phones] to search
the devices available nearby.
7 Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-
pears in the list.
p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that
you want to connect, check that the device
is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology connection.
En
61
Chapter
11
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device
8 Touch the Bluetooth device name you
want to register.
# If you touch [Search Again], the system starts
searching for Bluetooth devices waiting for con-
nection, and displays them in the list format
when any devices are detected.
9 Enter the password (the default pass-
word is 1111) using the Bluetooth de-
vice.
Enter the password while the message Please
follow the instructions on your mobile
phone. appears.
The device is registered in the navigation sys-
tem.
After the device is successfully registered, the
Bluetooth connection is established from the
navigation system.
Deleting a registered device
When you have already registered 5 Bluetooth
devices and you want to add another one, you
must first delete one of the registered devices.
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the
phone book entries and call history lists
that correspond to the phone will be also
cleared.
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Registration].
A message prompting you to delete a regis-
tered device appears.
4 Touch [OK].
The Delete from Connection List screen
appears.
5 Touch the Bluetooth device name that
you want to delete.
The device is deleted.
Connecting a registered
Bluetooth de vice manually
The navigation system automatically connects
the Bluetooth device selected as the target of
connection. However, connect the Bluetooth
device manually in the following cases:
! Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis-
tered, and you want to manually select the
device to be used.
! You want to reconnect a disconnected
Bluetooth device.
En
62
Chapter
11
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device
! Connection cannot be established automa-
tically for some reason.
If you start connection manually, carry out the
following procedure. You can also connect the
Bluetooth device by having the navigation sys-
tem detect it automatically.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your devices.
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific-action
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless
technology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your devices.
2 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
3 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
4 Touch [Connection].
The Connection List screen appears.
5 Touch the name of the device that you
want to connect.
The Select Profile screen appears.
6 Touch the profile that you want to con-
nect.
You can select the following profiles:
! Handsfree and Audio:
Connects the device as the hands-free
phone and the Bluetooth audio player.
! Audio:
Connects the device as Bluetooth audio
player.
! Handsfree:
Connects the device as the hands-free
phone.
Connection starts.
When a connection is successfully estab-
lished, a connection complete message ap-
pears and the map screen returns by touching
[OK].
p To cancel the connection to your device,
touch [Cancel].
p If connection fails, check whether your de-
vice is waiting for a connection and then
retry.
Setting for priority connecting
The selected device is set for priority connect-
ing.
And one of the following icons is indicated
next to the device name.
!
:
Appears when the device is registered so
that it will be preferentially paired with both
the hands-free and Bluetooth audio con-
nection.
!
:
Appears when the device is registered so
that it will be preferentially paired with the
Bluetooth audio connection.
!
:
Appears when the device is registered so
that it can be preferentially paired with the
hands-free connection.
En
63
Chapter
11
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device
CAUTION
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as
much as possible while driving.
If your cellular phone features Bluetooth tech-
nology, this navigation system can be con-
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using
this hands-free function, you can operate the
navigation system to make or receive phone
calls. You can also transfer the phone book
data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-
gation system. This section describes how to
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
technology on the navigation system.
For details about the connectivity with the de-
vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology,
refer to the information on our website.
Displaying the phone menu
Use the Phone Menu if you connect the cel-
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-
tion.
= For details, refer to Chapter 11.
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Phone].
The Phone Menu screen appears.
21 3 45
1 Name of connected cellular phone
2 Network name of the cellular phone com-
pany
3 Strength of the Bluetooth connection be-
tween the navigation system and the device
4 Reception status of the cellular phone
5 Battery status of the cellular phone
Making a phone call
You can make a phone call in many different
ways.
Direct dialing
1 Display the Phone Menu screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone
menu on this page.
2 Touch [Dial Pad].
The Dial Input screen appears.
3 Touch the number keys to enter the
phone number.
The phone number that was input is dis-
played.
When the input is complete, [OK] becomes
active.
# If you touch , the entered number is deleted
one digit at a time from the end of the number.
Press and hold to delete all digits.
# If you touch
, the previous screen returns.
4 Touch [OK] to make a call.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
5 Touch to end the call.
En
64
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
Making a call home easily
You can call home without taking the time to
enter the phone number if the phone number
has been registered.
1 Display the Phone Menu screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone
menu on the previous page.
2 Touch [Call Home].
Dialing home starts.
p If you have not registered your home num-
ber, a message appears. Touch [Register]
to start registration.
= For details, refer to Registering your
home on page 163.
Calling a number in the phone
book
You can select and call a contact from the
phone book entries transferred to the naviga-
tion system.
p Before using this function, you need to
transfer the phone book entries stored in
your cellular phone to the navigation sys-
tem.
= For details, refer to Transferring the phone
book on page 68.
Searching for a contact to call on the
alphabet tabs
1 Display the Phone Menu screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone
menu on the previous page.
2 Touch [Contacts].
The Contacts List screen appears.
3 Touch alphabet tabs.
The screen jumps to the top of the page dis-
playing the entries that start with the selected
letter or number.
p Touching [#ABCDE] displays all entries that
start with symbols or numbers.
p Touching [Others] displays the page includ-
ing entries that are not assigned to any of
the other tabs.
4 Touch the desired name on the list.
The Contacts Type Selection screen ap-
pears.
5 Touch the desired entry on the list to
make a call.
6 Touch
to end the call.
Calling a number by searching by name
1 Display the Phone Menu screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone
menu on the previous page.
2 Touch [Contacts].
The Contacts List screen appears.
3 Touch [Search].
The Contacts Name Search screen appears.
You can search by the names registered in the
Contacts List screen.
En
65
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
Using hands-free phoning
4 Enter the desired name and then touch
[OK].
The Contacts Name Search Results screen
appears.
5 Touch the desired name on the list.
The Contacts Type Selection screen ap-
pears.
6 Touch the desired entry on the list to
make a call.
7 Touch
to end the call.
Dialing from the history
The most recent calls made (dialed), received
and missed are stored in the call history list.
You can browse the call history list and call
numbers from it.
p Each call history saves 30 calls per regis-
tered cellular phone. If the number of calls
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.
1 Display the Phone Menu screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone
menu on page 64.
2 Touch [Received Calls], [Dialed Calls] or
[Missed Calls].
The selected call history list appears.
3 Touch an entry on the list.
Dialing starts.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
# If you touch [Detail], the Detailed Informa-
tion screen appears.
You can check the details of the party before mak-
ing a phone call.
4 Touch to end the call.
Dialing a favorite location
You can make a call to an entry stored in the
Favorites list.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Favorites].
The Favorites screen appears.
3 Touch
next to the location that you
want to make a call.
The Edit Favorite screen appears.
4 Touch [Call] to make a call.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
5 Touch to end the call.
Dialing a facilitys phone number
You can make a call to facilities with phone
number data.
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs
that have no phone number data.
1 Display the Destination Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
En
66
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
2 Touch [POI].
The POI Search screen appears.
3 Search for the POI.
The POI List screen appears.
= For details of the operation, refer to Search-
ing for Points of Interest (POI) on page 40.
4 Touch next to the POI that you want
to call.
The POI Information screen appears.
5 Touch [Call] to make a call.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
6 Touch to end the call.
Dialing from the map
You can make a call by selecting the icon of a
registered location or a POI icon from the map
screen.
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs
that have no phone number data.
1 Scroll the map, and place the cursor on
an icon on the map.
2 Touch
.
The Information List screen appears.
3 Touch the POI you want.
The POI Information screen appears.
4 Touch [Call] to make a call.
p To cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch
.
5 Touch to end the call.
Receiving a phone call
You can perform hands-free answering by
using the navigation system.
Answering an incoming call
The system informs you that it is receiving a
call by displaying a message and producing a
ring sound.
p You can set the system to automatically an-
swer incoming calls. If not set to automati-
cally answer incoming calls, you will have
to answer the calls manually.
= For details, refer to Answering a call
automatically on page 70.
p If the voice on the other end of the call is
too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume
of the received voice.
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume
for Guidance and Phone on page 173.
p The registered name appears if the phone
number of the received call is already regis-
tered in Contacts.
p Depending on the caller ID service, the
phone number of the received call may not
be displayed. Unknown appears instead.
1 To answer an incoming call, touch
.
The operation menu during a call appears.
# If you touch [Vol ]or[Vol +], you can adjust
the ring tone volume.
# If you touch
, an incoming call is re-
jected.
The rejected call is recorded in the missed call
history list.
= For details, refer to Dialing from the history
on the previous page.
En
67
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
Using hands-free phoning
2 Touch to end the call.
The call ends.
p You may hear a noise when you hang up
the phone.
# If you touch [Vol ]or[Vol +], you can adjust
the volume when talking.
# If you touch [Close Menu], the operation
menu during call is minimized.
To display the menu again, touch
.
Transferring the phone book
You can transfer the phone book entries from
your cellular phone to the phone book of the
navigation system.
p Depending on the cellular phone, phone
book may be called Contacts, Business
Card or something else.
p With some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to transfer the entire phone book
at once. In this case, transfer addresses
one at a time from your phone book using
your cellular phone.
p If you connect the cellular phone featuring
auto-synchronization function, phone book
transfer or synchronization will be automa-
tically performed.
p A maximum of 1 000 entries can be trans-
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-
ceed 1 000, the extra entries will not be
transferred. If more than one number is re-
gistered for one person, such as work place
and home, each number may be counted
separately.
p Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num-
bers.
p Depending on the cellular phone that is
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-
tem may not be able to display the phone
book correctly. (Some characters may be
garbled.)
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, the phone book may not
be correctly transferred.
p The transferred data cannot be edited on
the navigation system.
1 Connect the cellular phone that has the
phone book to transfer.
= For details, refer to Connecting a registered
Bluetooth device manually on page 62.
2 Touch [Contacts Transfer] on the
Phone Menu screen.
3 Check that the following screen is dis-
played, and operate your cellular phone to
transfer the phone book entries.
When data transfer is finished, a message ask-
ing whether you want to transfer more data
appears.
Touch [Yes] to continue the transfer.
En
68
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
4 Touch [No].
The transferred data is imported to the naviga-
tion system.
When the data is successfully imported, an
import complete message is displayed and the
Contacts List screen appears.
p It may take time depending on how many
entries will be transferred.
Changing the order of names in
the phone book
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Sort Order].
Each touch of [Sort Order] changes the set-
tings as follows:
! First (default):
Switches the contacts entries to first/last
name display and sort the entries by order
of first name.
! Last:
Switches the contacts entries to last/first
name display and sort the entries by order
of last name.
p Depending on the type of cellular phone,
the settings may not be available.
Deleting registered contacts
1 Display the Phone Menu screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the phone
menu on page 64.
2 Touch [Contacts].
The Contacts List screen appears.
3 Touch [Delete].
The Delete from Contacts screen appears.
4 Touch the entry you want to delete.
A check mark appears next to the entry.
# If you touch [All], you can select all entries. If
you want to deselect all entries, touch [None].
5 Touch [Delete].
The message confirming whether to delete the
entr y appears.
6 Touch [Yes].
The entry is deleted.
# If you touch [No], the deletion is canceled.
Changing the phone settings
Editing the device name
You can change the device name to be dis-
played on your cellular phone. (Default is
PIONEER NAVI.)
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Device Name].
The keyboard to enter the name appears.
4 Touch
to delete the current name,
and enter the new name by using the key-
board.
En
69
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
Using hands-free phoning
p Up to 16 characters can be entered for a de-
vice name.
5 Touch [OK].
The name is changed.
Editing the password
You can change the password to be used for
authentication on your cellular phone. (De-
fault is 1111.)
p Four to eight characters can be entered for
a password.
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Password].
The Set Password screen appears.
4 Touch
to delete the current pass-
word, and enter the new password by
using the keyboard.
5 Touch [OK].
The password is changed.
Stopping Bluetooth wave
transmission
You can stop transmission of electric waves by
turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do
not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we
recommend selecting Off.
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Bluetooth On/Off].
Each touch of [Bluetooth On/Off] changes
the settings as follows:
! On (default):
Turns on Bluetooth function.
! Off:
Turns off Bluetooth function.
Echo canceling and noise reduction
When you are operating hands-free phoning
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable
echo. This function reduces the echo and
noise while you are using hands-free phoning,
and maintains a certain sound quality.
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Echo Cancel].
Each touch of [Echo Cancel] changes the set-
tings as follows:
! On (default):
Activates echo canceling and noise reduc-
tion.
! Off:
Deactivates echo canceling and noise re-
duction.
Answering a call automatically
The navigation system automatically answers
incoming calls to the cellular phone, so you
can answer a call while driving without taking
your hands off the steering wheel.
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Auto Answer Preference].
The Auto Answer Preference screen ap-
pears.
En
70
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
4 Touch the desired option.
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
! Off (default):
No automatic response. Respond manually.
! Immediately:
Answers immediately.
! After 3 seconds:
Answers after three seconds.
! After 6 seconds:
Answers after six seconds.
! After 10 seconds:
Answers after ten seconds.
Setting the automatic rejection
function
If this function is on, the navigation system
automatically rejects all incoming calls.
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Refuse All Calls].
Each touch of [Refuse All Calls] changes the
settings as follows:
! Off (default):
Accepts all incoming calls.
! On:
Rejects all incoming calls.
p If both Refuse All Calls and Auto An-
swer Preference are activated, Refuse
All Calls takes priority and all incoming
calls are automatically rejected.
p If Refuse All Calls is set to On, rejected
incoming calls will not be stored in the
missed call list.
Clearing memory
You can clear the memory of each item that
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:
phone book, dialed/received/missed call his-
tory list and preset dials.
1 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Clear Memory].
The Clear Memory screen appears.
4 Touch the desired option.
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
! Contacts:
Clears the registered phone book.
! Received Calls List:
Clears the received call history list.
! Dialed Calls List:
Clears the dialed call history list.
! Missed Calls List:
Clears the missed call history list.
# If you touch [Clear All ], all the data is cleared
that correspond to the connected cellular phone.
5 Touch [Yes].
Data on the selected item is cleared from this
navigation systems memory.
# If you do not want to clear the memory that
you have selected, touch [No].
En
71
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
Using hands-free phoning
Updating the Bluetooth
wireless technology software
Update files will be available for download in
the future. You will be able to download the lat-
est update from an appropriate website to
your PC.
p Before you download the files and install
the update, read through the instructions
on the website. Follow the instructions on
the website for steps until [Firmware up-
date] becomes active.
1 Store the updated files into the SD
memory card.
2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
3 Display the Settings Menu screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
4 Touch [Bluetooth Settings].
The Bluetooth Settings screen appears.
5 Touch [Firmware update].
The current version is displayed.
6 Touch [Firmware update].
The message confirming whether or not to
start the update will appear.
7 Touch [Yes].
Update starts.
8 Wait until the upgrade process is com-
plete.
A message will appear after the update is
complete.
9 Touch [OK].
The message disappears, and the map screen
returns.
10 Eject the SD memory card.
Notes for hands-free phoning
General notes
! Connection to all cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-
anteed.
! The line-of-sight distance between this na-
vigation system and your cellular phone
must be 10 meters or less when sending
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth
technology. However, the actual transmis-
sion distance may be shorter than the esti-
mated distance, depending on the usage
environment.
! With some cellular phones, the ring sound
may not be output from the speakers.
! If private mode is selected on the cellular
phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-
abled.
Registration and connection
! Cellular phone operations vary depending
on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the
instruction manual that came with your cel-
lular phone for detailed instructions.
! With cellular phones, phone book transfer
may not work even though your phone is
paired with the navigation system. In that
case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-
ing again from your phone to the naviga-
tion system, and then perform the phone
book transfer.
Making and receiving calls
! You may hear a noise in the following situa-
tions:
En
72
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
When you answer the phone by using
the button on the phone.
When the person on the other end of
line hangs up the phone.
! If the person on the other end of the phone
call cannot hear the conversation due to an
echo, decrease the volume level for hands-
free phoning. This may reduce the echo.
! With some cellular phones, even if you
press the accept button on the cellular
phone when a call comes in, hands-free
phoning may not be performed.
! The registered name appears if the phone
number of the received call is already regis-
tered in the phone book. When one phone
number is registered under different
names, the name that comes first in the
phone book is displayed.
! If the phone number of the received call is
not registered in the phone book, the
phone number of the received call appears.
The received call history and the dialed
number history
! Calls made or editing performed only on
your cellular phone will not be reflected to
the dialed number history or phone book in
the navigation system.
! You cannot make a call to the entry of an
unknown user (no phone number) in the re-
ceived call history.
! If calls are made by operating your cellular
phone, no history data will be recorded in
the navigation system.
Phone book transfers
! If there are more than 1 000 phone book en-
tries on your cellular phone, all entries may
not be downloaded completely.
! With some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to transfer all items in the phone
book at one time. In this case, transfer
items one by one from your cellular phone.
! Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-
gation system may not display the phone
book correctly. (Some characters may be
garbled, or first and last names may be re-
versed.)
! If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, the phone book may not
be transferred correctly. (Image data can-
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)
! Depending on the cellular phone, phone
book transfer may not be available.
En
73
Chapter
12
Using hands-free phoning
Using hands-free phoning
This chapter describes the basic operations of
the AV source.
You can play or use the following sources with
your Pioneer navigation system.
! Tuner (HD Radio
tuner) (*1)
! FM (*2)
! AM (*2)
! CD
! ROM (in MP3, AAC, WMA)
! DVD-Video
! DivX
! USB
! SD
The following sources can be played back or
used by connecting an auxiliary device.
! HD Radio (HD Radio
tuner) (*2)
! iPod
! Smartphone application (Pandora, Aha
Radio)
! Bluetooth audio
! XM Tuner
! SIRIUS Tuner
! AV input 1 (AV1)
! AV input 2 (AV2)
! External unit 1 (EXT1)
! External unit 2 (EXT2)
p (*1) A source available only on AVIC-
Z140BH.
p (*2) Sources available on AVIC-X940BT.
Displaying the AV
operation screen
% Press the MODE button when the map
screen is displayed.
p The AV operation screen can also be dis-
played by touching [AV Source & Con-
tents] on the Top Menu.
Selecting a source
Source icons
1 Touch, then drag any source icons up or
down to display additional source icons.
The AV source icons will scroll, and previously
hidden icons will appear.
2 Tap the icon of the source you want to
select.
The operation screen of the selected source
appears.
p The currently selected source icon is high-
lighted.
Operating list screens (e.g.
iPod list screen)
This describes the operations when a list
screen is displayed.
p For information on how to display the list
screen, refer to the descriptions within the
desired source portion of this manual.
Switching between the AV
operation screen and the list
screen
The following example describes how to
switch between the AV operation screen and
the artist list screen of iPod.
En
74
Chapter
13
Basic operations of the AV source
1 Touch the appropriate key to display
the list that you want.
2 Touch the key on the right edge of the
screen.
The AV operation screen returns.
Selecting an item
1 Scroll the list by dragging items up or
down to display the item you want to se-
lect.
p Flicking a list item enables you to quickly
scroll through the list.
To stop scrolling, gently touch the list.
2 Tap the item.
p The item currently selected is highlighted.
Returning to the previous display
% Touch to return to the previous
screen.
En
75
Chapter
13
Basic operations of the AV source
Basic operations of the AV source
p This function is available for AVIC-X940BT
only.
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for radio (FM).
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Tap [FM] on the left edge of the screen
to display the FM screen.
When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD
Radio broadcasting, [FM] cannot be selected.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the radio.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on the next page.
Reading the screen
1
23 6
54 7
8
9
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1
to FM3.
3 Program service name indicator
Shows the program service name (station
name) of the current station.
4 Signal level indicator
5 Frequency indicator
6 STEREO indicator
Shows that the frequency selected is being
broadcast in stereo.
7 Current time
8 Program service name or frequency indi-
cator
Shows the frequency of the preset item. If the
program service name can be obtained, the
program service name is shown instead of the
frequency.
9 Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
En
76
Chapter
14
Using the radio (FM)
Using the touch panel keys
6
5
1
34
2
1 Performs manual tuning
To tune manually, touch [o]or[p] briefly.
The frequencies move up or down one step at
a time.
Performs seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]
or [p] for about one second and then re-
lease. The tuner will scan frequencies until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception
is found.
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [o]or[p] briefly.
p If you keep holding [o]or[p], you
can skip broadcasting frequencies.
Seek tuning will start at the time you re-
lease the keys.
2 Selects a preset channel
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-
nels.
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-
play the preset channel you want to select,
and tap the channel.
p The lower keys and the upper keys ap-
pear only when the preset channel is se-
lected.
3 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
4 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on the next page.
5 Switches between the AV operation
screen and the preset list display
You can switch the screen display according
to your preference.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Switching between the AV operation
screen and the list screen on page 74.
6 Selects an FM band
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between
the following FM bands: FM1, FM2,orFM3.
p This function is convenient for preparing
different preset lists for each band.
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys
(P1 to P6), you can easily store up to six
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also
with the tap of a key).
En
77
Chapter
14
Using the radio (FM)
Using the radio (FM)
1 Select a frequency that you want to
store in memory.
2 Display the preset channel list.
= For details, refer to Switches between the
AV operation screen and the preset list
display on the previous page.
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6].
Preset list display
Preset tuning keys
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
The next time you tap the same preset tuning
key P1 to P6, the radio station frequencies
are recalled from memory.
p Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the
three FM bands can be stored in memory.
= For details of the list operations, refer to Op-
erating list screens (e.g. iPod list screen) on
page 74.
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can move preset channels up or down.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform seek tuning.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the FM screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-
cies
2 Tunes in strong signals
= For details of each function, refer to sec-
tions below with the relative titles.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys P1 to
P6 and, once stored there, you can tune into
them with the touch of a key.
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved.
1 Touch
on the FM screen.
The Function menu appears.
2 Touch [BSM].
3 Touch [Start] to begin a search.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flash-
ing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies
will be stored under the preset tuning keys
P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength.
When this is complete, BSM stops flashing.
# If you touch [Stop], the storage process is
canceled.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
En
78
Chapter
14
Using the radio (FM)
1 Touch on the FM screen.
The Function menu appears.
2 Touch [Local].
3 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
# If you touch [Off], local seek tuning is turned
off.
4 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
sitivity.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.
Level: 1 2 3 4
p The level 4 setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings
let you receive weaker stations.
En
79
Chapter
14
Using the radio (FM)
Using the radio (FM)
p This function is available for AVIC-X940BT
only.
You can listen to the radio using this naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for radio (AM).
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Tap [AM] on the left edge of the screen
to display the AM screen.
When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD
Radio broadcasting, [AM] cannot be selected.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the radio.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on the next page.
Reading the screen
1
32
4
3
5
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Signal level indicator
3 Frequency indicator
Shows the current frequency.
4 Current time
5 Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
En
80
Chapter
15
Using the radio (AM)
Using the touch panel keys
5
1
34
2
1 Performs manual tuning
To tune manually, touch [o]or[p] briefly.
The frequencies move up or down one step at
a time.
Performs seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]
or [p] for about one second and then re-
lease. The tuner will scan frequencies until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception
is found.
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [o]or[p] briefly.
p If you keep holding [o]or[p], you
can skip broadcasting frequencies.
Seek tuning will start at the time you re-
lease the keys.
2 Selects a preset channel
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-
nels.
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-
play the preset channel you want to select,
and tap the channel.
p The lower keys and the upper keys ap-
pear only when the preset channel is se-
lected.
3 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
4 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on the next page.
5 Switches between the AV operation
screen and the preset list display
You can switch the screen display according
to your preference.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Switching between the AV operation
screen and the list screen on page 74.
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys
(P1 to P6), you can easily store up to six
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also
with the tap of a key).
1 Select a frequency that you want to
store in memory.
En
81
Chapter
15
Using the radio (AM)
Using the radio (AM)
2 Display the preset channel list.
= For details, refer to Switches between the
AV operation screen and the preset list
display on the previous page.
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6].
Preset list display
Preset tuning keys
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
The next time you tap the same preset tuning
key P1 to P6, the radio station frequencies
are recalled from memory.
= For details of the list operations, refer to Op-
erating list screens (e.g. iPod list screen) on
page 74.
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can move preset channels up or down.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform seek tuning.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the AM screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-
cies
2 Tunes in strong signals
= For details of each function, refer to sec-
tions below with the relative titles.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys P1 to
P6 and, once stored there, you can tune into
them with the touch of a key.
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved.
1 Touch
on the AM screen.
The Function menu appears.
2 Touch [BSM].
3 Touch [Start] to begin a search.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flash-
ing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies
will be stored under the preset tuning keys
P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength.
When this is complete, BSM stops flashing.
# If you touch [Stop], the storage process is
canceled.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
En
82
Chapter
15
Using the radio (AM)
1 Touch on the AM screen.
The Function menu appears.
2 Touch [Local].
3 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
# If you touch [Off], local seek tuning is turned
off.
4 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
sitivity.
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.
Level: 1 2
p The level 2 setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings
let you receive weaker stations.
En
83
Chapter
15
Using the radio (AM)
Using the radio (AM)
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for HD Radio reception.
For AVIC-X940BTusers
This navigation system is ready to receive HD
Radio broadcasts when connected to the GEX-
P20HD, GEX-P10HD, sold separately.
p For details concerning operation, refer to
the HD Radio tuners operation manual.
p AVIC-Z140BH shows Tuner and AVIC-
X940BT shows HD Radio as the source
icon.
This chapter describes operation proce-
dures for AVIC-Z140BH.
HD Radio broadcasting
HD Radio broadcasting is high quality audio
and data services. HD Radio broadcasting is
brought to you by your local FM or AM sta-
tions.
HD Radio broadcasting features the following:
! High quality audio
! FM multicasting
! Data services
: Sub channel
AM band
Analog AM
Analog AM Digital AM
FM band
Analog FM
Analog FM Digital FM
Analog FM Digital FM-1ch
Digital FM-2ch
Digital FM-3ch
: Main channel
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables
local radio stations to broadcast a clean digital signal.
AM sounds like todays FM and FM sounds like a CD.
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user
experience of HD Radio Technology. Presents song
name, artist, station IDs, HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and
other relevant data streams.
Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM
channels. These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, origi-
nal music as well as deep cuts into traditional genre.
iTunes
®
Tagging provides you the opportunity to discover
a wide range of content and the means to tag that con-
tent for later review and purchase from the iTunes
®
Store.
Visual information related to content being played on
your HD Radio receiver, such as Album Art, historical
photographs, still art from live broadcasts, among other
related content.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Tap [Tuner] on the left edge of the
screen to display the Tuner screen.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the radio.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on page 86.
En
84
Chapter
16
HD Radio
reception
Reading the screen
e
d
12 6
54 783 9
a
c
b
p Items marked with asterisk (*) appear only
on AVIC-Z140BH.
1 Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1,
FM2, FM3 or AM.
2 Detailed information
= For details, refer to Switching the display
on page 87.
3 Signal level indicator
4 Frequency indicator
5 Signal type indicator
Shows the type of signal currently being re-
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received,
D appears. Otherwise, A appears.
6 Blending mode indicator
= For details, refer to Switching the recep-
tion mode on page 89.
7 Song info reception indicator*
Shows the reception status of song informa-
tion.
Indicator Meaning
Appears when the navigation
system receives song informa-
tion and can store it.
The icon is displayed on the op-
eration screen of the HD Radio
receiver.
Appears when the navigation
system is storing song informa-
tion.
The icon is displayed on all op-
eration screens of AV sources.
8 Song info status indicator*
Shows the status of the song information
stored in the navigation system.
Indicator Meaning
The number of song information
items stored in the navigation
system is displayed.
The icon is displayed on all op-
eration screens of AV sources.
Appears when song information
is transferred to iPod.
The icon is displayed on all op-
eration screens of AV sources.
9 Current time
a Album artwork
Shows the album artwork of the current song
if it is available.
p If the album artwork cannot be ac-
quired, the station logo is displayed.
When the station logo cannot be ac-
quired either, the preset number indica-
tor is displayed.
p The AVIC-X940BT shows the preset num-
ber indicator only.
b Preset number indicator
= Shows what preset item has been se-
lected.
c Seek type indicator
= For details, refer to Switching the seek
mode on page 89.
d Multicasting indicator
Shows the number of multicast channels in
the current frequency.
e Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
En
85
Chapter
16
HD Radio
reception
HD Radio
reception
Using the touch panel keys
7
8
1
56
2
4 3
p Items marked with asterisk (*) appear only
on AVIC-Z140BH.
1 Performs manual tuning
To tune manually, touch [o]or[p] briefly.
The frequencies move up or down one step at
a time.
Performs seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]
or [p] for about one second and then re-
lease. The tuner will scan frequencies until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception
is found.
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [o]or[p] briefly.
p When an analog station is received, tun-
ing up or down is conducted within ana-
log broadcasts.
If a digital broadcast is not yet received,
tuning up or down tunes into the next or
previous analog station.
Analog FM
Analog FM
Analog FM Digital FM-1ch
Digital FM-2ch
Digital FM-3ch
2 Selects a preset channel
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-
nels.
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-
play the preset channel you want to select,
and tap the channel.
p The lower keys and the upper keys ap-
pear only when the preset channel is se-
lected.
3 Stores song information to an iPod*
En
86
Chapter
16
HD Radio
reception
Touch this key when receiving the song infor-
mation of the song on air, and you can store
the song information on your iPod.
= For details, refer to Storing song informa-
tion to an iPod (iTunes Tagging) on the
next page.
4 Switches the display
= For details, refer to Switching the display
on this page.
5 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
6 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on the next page.
7 Switches between the AV operation
screen and the preset list display
You can switch the screen display according
to your preference.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Switching between the AV operation
screen and the list screen on page 74.
8 Selects a band
Tap the key repeatedly until the desired band
is displayed: FM1, FM2, FM3,orAM.
p This function is convenient for preparing
different preset lists for each band.
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys
(Preset 1 to Preset 6), you can easily store
up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall
(also with the tap of a key).
1 Select a frequency that you want to
store in memory.
2 Display the preset channel list.
= For details, refer to Switches between the
AV operation screen and the preset list
display on this page.
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [Pre-
set 1] to [Preset 6].
Preset list display
Preset tuning keys
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
The next time you tap the same preset tuning
key Preset 1 to Preset 6, the radio station
frequencies are recalled from memory.
p Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the
three FM bands, as well as six AM stations,
can be stored in memory.
= For details, refer to Operating list screens
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 74.
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can move preset channels up or down.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform seek tuning.
Switching the display
Desired information can be displayed.
% Touch [Disp].
AVIC-Z140BH
Touching [Disp] repeatedly switches between
the following settings:
Channel name Artist name Song title
Genre
AVIC-X940BT
The contents and order of the setting display
depend on the HD Radio tuner.
En
87
Chapter
16
HD Radio
reception
HD Radio
reception
p Only when the tuner has been tuned in to
an HD Radio station, can the display be
changed.
p When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD
Radio station, default display is changed
into station name instead of frequency.
Scrolling the detailed information
You can turn the detailed information scroll
mode on and off.
% Touch and hold [Disp].
Storing song information
to an iPod (iTunes Tagging)
p This function is available for AVIC-Z140BH
only.
You can store the song information to the
iPod, when the navigation system has received
the song information. The songs will show up
in a playlist called Tagged playlist in iTunes
next time you sync your iPod. You can directly
buy the songs via the navigation system.
Depending on when the song information is
stored, information on the songs before and
after the song on air may also be stored. Be
sure to confirm the song before you purchase.
p The iTunes Tagging function is available
during reception of digital broadcasts.
p This function can be operated with the fol-
lowing iPod models:
! iPod touch 4th generation
! iPod touch 3rd generation
! iPod touch 2nd generation
! iPod touch 1st generation
! iPod classic
! iPod nano 6th generation
! iPod nano 5th generation
! iPod nano 4th generation
! iPod nano 3rd generation
! iPhone 4S
! iPhone 4
! iPhone 3GS
! iPhone 3G
! iPhone
p The version of iTunes must be 7.4 or higher.
1 Tune into the digital broadcast station.
When song information is received,
is
displayed while the desired song is being
broadcast, and [Tag] becomes active.
= For details, refer to Song info reception in-
dicator* on page 85.
2 Touch [Tag].
The information on the song on air is stored in
the navigation system.
While the information is being acquired,
is displayed.
When completed,
turns off and is
displayed.
p The song information for up to 50 songs
can be stored on this navigation system.
Depending on when the song information
is stored, information for the previous song
or song after the current song may also be
stored.
3 Connect your iPod.
The song information stored in the navigation
system is transferred to your iPod.
p If the iPod is already connected, every time
you touch [Tag], the song information will
be transferred to your iPod.
When the song information is stored on
your iPod,
disappears.
p When transfer of song information is com-
pleted, the information stored in the naviga-
tion system will be automatically cleared.
p If you turn off the navigation system or dis-
connect the iPod while transferring song in-
formation to it, the transfer may not
complete.
p While the song information is stored in the
navigation system, transfer to iPod is not
possible.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the Tuner screen.
The Function menu appears.
En
88
Chapter
16
HD Radio
reception
1 2 3 4
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-
cies
2 Switches the seek mode
3 Tunes in strong signals
4 Switches the reception mode
= For details of each function, refer to sec-
tions below with the relative titles.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys Preset
1 to Preset 6 and, once stored there, you
can tune in to these frequencies with the
touch of a key.
1 Touch
on the Tuner screen.
2 Touch [BSM].
3 Touch [Start] to begin a search.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flash-
ing, the six strongest broadcast frequencies
will be stored under the preset tuning keys
Preset 1 to Preset 6 in order of their signal
strength. When this is complete, BSM stops
flashing.
p To cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop].
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved.
Switching the seek mode
You can select the method of seek tuning.
1 Touch
on the Tuner screen.
2 Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-
ting.
! All:
Seeks stations from both analog and digital
broadcasting.
! HD:
Seeks from digital broadcasting only.
p If you select HD on this setting while
[Blending] is set to Analog, the setting
on [Blending] turns to D/A Auto automa-
tically.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
1 Touch
on the Tuner screen.
2 Touch [Local].
3 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
4 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
sitivity.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and
two levels for AM:
FM: 1 2 3 4
AM: 1 2
p The FM 4 (AM 2) setting allows recep-
tion of only the strongest stations, while
lower settings let you receive weaker sta-
tions.
Switching the reception mode
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets
poor, the tuner automatically switches to the
analog broadcast of the same frequency level
by default. If you want to prevent a frequent
automatic switching, switch this setting to
[Analog].
1 Touch
on the Tuner screen.
En
89
Chapter
16
HD Radio
reception
HD Radio
reception
2 Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-
tion mode.
! Analog:
Receives analog broadcasting only.
! D/A Auto:
Automatically switches to the analog broad-
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-
tal broadcast.
p If you select Analog on this setting while
[Seek] is set to HD, the setting on [Seek]
turns to All automatically.
En
90
Chapter
16
HD Radio
reception
You can play a normal music CD using the
built-in drive of the navigation system. This
section describes how.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Insert the disc you want to play into
disc-loading slot.
Playback starts from the first track of the CD.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a
disc on page 17.
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the
left edge of the screen.
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 74.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the disc.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on the next page.
Reading the screen
1
2
3
4
5
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Playback condition indicator
Indicates the current playback condition.
Scanning tracks of a CD
Indicator Meaning
Cancels the scan play.
Plays the beginning of each
track in the current repeat play
range for about 10 seconds.
Playing tracks in random order
Indicator Meaning
Does not play tracks in random
order.
Plays all tracks in the current
disc in random order.
Setting a repeat play range
Indicator Meaning
Repeats the current disc.
Repeats just the current track.
3 Current track information
! : Artist name
Shows the artist name of the track cur-
rently playing (when available).
!
: Album title
Shows the title of the album of the cur-
rent track (when available).
!
: Track title
Shows the title of the track currently
playing (when available).
! Play time
Shows the elapsed playing time within
the current track.
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
4 Current time
5 Track information
! Track number indicator
Shows the track number and the total
number of tracks in the current repeat
range.
! Track title indicator
En
91
Chapter
17
Playing audio CDs
Playing audio CDs
Using the touch panel keys
9
8
7
123
56
4
1 Scans tracks of a CD
Scan play is performed by touching only one
key.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Scans tracks of a CD on the next page.
2 Plays tracks in random order
All of the tracks in the disc can be played at
random by touching only one key.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Plays tracks in random order on the
next page.
3 Sets a repeat play range
The repeat play range can be changed by
touching only one key.
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat
range on the next page.
4 Selects a track to play
Scrolling the keys up or down displays tracks,
and tapping a track starts playback.
Tapping the lower key during random play-
back skips to the next track. Tapping the
upper key jumps to the start of the current
track.
5 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
6 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on the next page.
7 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
8 Selects a track from the list
Touching the key displays the list which lets
you see the list of track titles on a disc. You
can play a track on the list by tapping it.
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
= For details, refer to Operating list screens
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 74.
9 Switches the media file type played
= For details, refer to Switches the
media file type played on page 97.
En
92
Chapter
17
Playing audio CDs
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip tracks forward or backward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the CD screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2 3 4
1 Changes the repeat range
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
! Disc: Repeats the current disc.
! Track: Repeats just the current track.
p If you perform track search or fast for-
ward or reverse, track repeat playback is
automatically canceled.
2 Plays tracks in random order
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.
p If you turn the random play on when the
repeat play range is set to Track, the
repeat play range changes to Disc
automatically.
3 Scans tracks of a CD
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off. Scan
play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of
each track on the CD. When you find the
track you want, touch [Scan] to turn scan
play off.
p After scanning is finished, normal play-
back of the tracks will begin again.
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-
peat play range is set to Track, the re-
peat play range changes to Disc
automatically.
4 Uses Sound Retriever function
Sound Retriever function automatically
enhances compressed audio and restores
rich sound.
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes
the setting as follows:
! MODE 1: Activates Sound Retriever
function.
! MODE 2: Activates Sound Retriever
function.
! Off: Deactivates Sound Retriever
function.
p MODE 2 has a stronger effect than
MODE 1 and is more effective when
playing back highly compressed audio
data.
En
93
Chapter
17
Playing audio CDs
Playing audio CDs
You can play a disc that contains compressed
audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-
gation system. This section describes these
operations.
p In the following description, the MP3,
WMA, AAC files are collectively referred to
as Compressed audio file.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Insert the disc you want to play into
disc-loading slot.
Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a
disc on page 17.
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the
left edge of the screen.
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 74.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the disc.
= For details concerning operations, refer to
Using the touch panel k eys on page 96.
Reading the screen
1
2
3
4
5
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Playback condition indicator
Indicates the current playback condition.
Scanning folders and files
Indicator Meaning
Cancels the scan play.
Plays the first audio files of each
folder for about 10 seconds
when the repeat range is set to
Disc.
Plays the beginning of each
audio file in the current folder
for about 10 seconds when the
repeat range is set to Folder.
Playing files in random order
Indicator Meaning
Does not play files in random
order.
Plays all audio files in the cur-
rent repeat play range in ran-
dom order.
Setting a repeat play range
Indicator Meaning
Repeats all compressed audio
files.
Repeats just the current file.
Repeats the current folder.
3 Current file information
! : Folder name
Shows the folder name currently play-
ing.
!
: Artist name
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available).
!
: Album title
Shows the title of the album of the cur-
rent file (when available).
!
: Track title
Shows the title of the track currently
playing (when available).
p If the title of a track is not available,
the file name appears.
! Play time
Shows the elapsed playing time within
the current file.
En
94
Chapter
18
Playing music files on ROM
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
4 Current time
5 File information
! File number indicator
! File name indicator
! File type indicator
Shows the type of audio files.
En
95
Chapter
18
Playing music files on ROM
Playing music files on ROM
Using the touch panel keys
9
8
7
123
56
4
1 Scans folders and files
Scan play is performed by touching only one
key.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Scans folders and files on the next
page.
2 Plays files in random order
The files in the current repeat play range can
be played at random by touching only one key.
p If the disc contains a mixture of various
media file types, all tracks or files within
the current part (CD or ROM) are
played randomly.
= For details, refer to Plays files in ran-
dom order on the next page.
3 Sets a repeat play range
The repeat play range can be changed by
touching only one key.
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat
range on the next page.
4 Selects a file to play
Scrolling the keys up or down displays files,
and tapping a file starts playback.
Tapping the lower key during random play-
back skips to the next file. Tapping the upper
key jumps to the start of the current file.
5 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
6 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on the next page.
7 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
8 Selects a file from the list
Touching the key displays the list which lets
you see the list of track titles or folder names
on a disc.
p If the title of a track is not available, the
file name appears.
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.
En
96
Chapter
18
Playing music files on ROM
= For details, refer to Operating list screens
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 74.
Touching displays the content of the upper
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder
is listed,
cannot be used.
9 Switches the media file type played
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types, you can switch be-
tween media file types to play.
Tap the key repeatedly to switch between the
following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (com-
pressed audio file) DivX (DivX video
files)
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip files forward or backward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the ROM screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2 3 4
1 Changes the repeat range
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
! Disc: Repeats all compressed audio
files.
! Track: Repeats just the current file.
! Folder: Repeats the current folder.
p If you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to
Disc.
p If you perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward during Track, the repeat play
range changes to Folder.
p When Folder is selected, it is not pos-
sible to playback a subfolder of that
folder.
p When playing discs with compressed
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-
peat play is performed within the cur-
rently playing data session even if Disc
is selected.
2 Plays files in random order
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.
When the random play is turned on, the
files in the current repeat play range are
randomly played.
p If you turn the random play on when the
repeat play range is set to Track, the
repeat play range changes to Folder
automatically.
3 Scans folders and files
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds
of each file. Scan play is performed in the
current repeat play range.
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off.
When you find the file you want, touch
[Scan] to turn the scan play off.
p After completion of file or folder scan-
ning, normal playback of the files will
begin again.
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-
peat play range is set to Track, the re-
peat play range changes to Folder
automatically.
p If you turn the scan play on while the re-
peat play range is set to Disc, scan
play is performed for only the first file of
each folder.
4 Uses Sound Retriever function
Sound Retriever function automatically
enhances compressed audio and restores
rich sound.
En
97
Chapter
18
Playing music files on ROM
Playing music files on ROM
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes
the setting as follows:
! MODE 1: Activates Sound Retriever
function.
! MODE 2: Activates Sound Retriever
function.
! Off: Deactivates Sound Retriever
function.
p MODE 2 has a stronger effect than
MODE 1 and is more effective when
playing back highly compressed audio
data.
En
98
Chapter
18
Playing music files on ROM
You can play a DVD -Video using the built-in
drive of the navigation system. This section de-
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Insert the disc you want to play into
disc-loading slot.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a
disc on page 17.
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the
left edge of the screen.
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 74.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the disc.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on the next page.
Reading the screen
b
1 5 6 72 3 4
a
8
9
1 Title number indicator
Shows the title number currently playing.
2 Audio track indicator
Shows the audio track number and audio lan-
guage currently selected.
3 Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter number currently playing.
4 Audio channel indicator
Shows the current audio channel type, such
as Mch (Multi-channel).
5 Subtitle number indicator
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.
6 Subtitle language indicator
Shows the subtitle language currently se-
lected.
7 Viewing angle indicator
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.
8 Current time
9 Digital sound format indicator
Shows which digital sound format (surround
sound format) has been selected.
a Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current title.
b Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
En
99
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
Playing a DVD-Video
Using the touch panel keys
Playback screen (page 1)
7
a
9
8
b
654321
Playback screen (page 2) Playback screen (page 3)
g
f
e
dc
jih
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is inva-
lid.
1 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on page 103.
2 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
3 Switches the display
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the
information plate as follows:
Disc information display Repeat range and
L/R select display
4 Switches to the next page of touch panel
keys
5 Displays the DVD menu keypad
= For details, refer to Using DVD menu by
touch panel keys on page 102.
6 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
7 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-
tion of the current video
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.
p If you want to display the touch panel
keys and information of the current
video again, touch anywhere on the LCD
screen.
En
100
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
8 Skips forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the
start of the current chapter. Touching it twice
quickly will skip to the previous chapter.
9 Stops playback
When [g] is touched once to stop playback,
playback can be resumed from the stopped
position. When [g] is touched two times to
stop playback, playback returns to the begin-
ning.
a Displays the DVD menu
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]
or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-
ing either of these keys again lets you start
playback from the location selected from the
menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-
vided with the disc.
b Resumes playback (Bookmark)
= For details, refer to Resuming playback
(Bookmark) on this page.
c Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-
back on page 103.
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback
on page 103.
d Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [m]or[n] to perform fast
reverse or forward.
If you keep touching [m]or[n] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f] or opposite key of [m]or[n] which
you touched.
e Skips the title forward or backward
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous
title.
f Performs an operation (such as resuming)
that is stored on the disc
When using a DVD that has a point recorded
that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-
turns to the specified point and begins play-
back from that point.
g Searches for a desired scene and starts
playback from a specified time
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a
specified time on the next page.
h Changes the audio track (Multi-audio)
Each touch of [Audio] switches between
audio tracks recorded in the disc.
p DTS audio format cannot be output, so
select an audio track other than DTS
audio format.
p Display indications such as MPEG-A
and Mch describe the audio track re-
corded on the DVD. This indication may
not be the same as the actual sound
currently output from the navigation sys-
tem.
i Changes the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the
subtitle languages recorded on the disc.
j Changes the viewing angle (Multi-angle)
Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-
ing angles.
p During playback of a scene shot from
multiple angles, the angle icon
is
displayed. Turn the angle icon display
on or off using the DVD/DivX® Setup
menu.
= For details, refer to Setting the angle icon
display on page 109.
Resuming playback (Bookmark)
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-
back from a selected scene the next time the
disc is loaded.
% Touch [BookM.].
En
101
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
Playing a DVD-Video
You can bookmark one point for each of up to
five discs. If you try to memorize another point
for the same disc, the older bookmark will be
overwritten by the newer one.
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and
hold [BookM.].
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for the scene you want by spe-
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.
p Chapter search and time search are not
available when disc playback has been
stopped.
1 Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).
2 Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
For titles, chapters
! To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter]in
order.
For time (time search)
! To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].
To cancel the input numbers, touch and
hold [Clear].
Direct number search
You can use this function when you need to
enter a numerical command during DVD play-
back.
1 Touch [Search].
2 Touch [10Key].
3 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
number.
4 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
Operating the DVD menu
You can operate the DVD menu by touching
the menu item on the screen directly.
p This function can be used when the
key is displayed on the lower right corner of
the LCD screen.
p This function may not work properly with
some DVD disc content. In that case, use
touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.
p If you touch the screen while
is dis-
played, the touch panel keys will not be dis-
played.
1 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
2 Touch [Top Menu] or [Menu] to display
touch panel keys to operate the DVD
menu.
3 Touch the desired menu item.
# If you touch , the touch panel keys for
selecting the menu item are displayed.
Using DVD menu by touch
panel keys
If items on the DVD menu appear, the touch
panel keys may overlay them. If so, select an
item using those touch panel keys.
En
102
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
1 Touch [a], [b], [c]or[d] to select the
desired menu item.
p If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-
tion disappear, touching anywhere on the
screen, then touch
. The touch panel
keys are displayed again.
2 Touch [Enter].
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
The way to display the menu differs depending
on the disc.
# If you touch [Position], the display position of
touch panel keys is changed each time you touch
it.
# If you touch [Hide], the touch panel keys dis-
appear and the
icon is displayed. You can
select a menu item by touching it.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during pause.
% Touch [r] during pause.
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead
one frame.
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
1 Touch and hold [r] until
is dis-
played during playback.
The icon
is displayed, and forward slow
motion playback begins.
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].
2 Touch [q]or[r] to adjust playback
speed during slow motion playback.
Each time you touch [q]or[r] it changes
the speed in four steps in the following order:
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2
p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip chapters forward or backward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the DVD-V screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2 3
1 Changes the repeat range
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
! Disc: Plays throughout the current disc.
! Chapter: Repeats just the current chap-
ter.
! Title: Repeats just the current title.
En
103
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
Playing a DVD-Video
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast
forward, fast reverse or slow motion
playback, the repeat play range changes
to Disc.
p This function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
2 Selects audio output
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM
audio, you can switch the audio output.
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-
sired audio output appears on the display.
Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-
tings as follows:
! L+R: Left and right
! L: Left
! R: Right
! Mix: Mixing left and right
p This function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
3 DVD setup adjustments
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/
DivX® Setup menu on page 109.
En
104
Chapter
19
Playing a DVD-Video
You can play a DivX disc using the built-in
drive of the navigation system. This section de-
scribes those operations.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Insert the disc you want to play into
disc-loading slot.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting a
disc on page 17.
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the
left edge of the screen.
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 74.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the disc.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on the next page.
Reading the screen
a
1562 3 4 7
9
8
1 Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
2 Audio track indicator
Shows the audio track number currently se-
lected.
3 File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
4 Audio channel indicator
Shows the current audio channel type, such
as Mch (Multi-channel).
5 Subtitle number indicator
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.
6 Repeat range indicator
Shows which repeat range has been selected.
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat
range on page 108.
7 Current time
8 Digital sound format indicator
Shows the digital sound format (surround
sound format) currently selected.
9 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current file.
a Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
En
105
Chapter
20
Playing a DivX video
Playing a DivX video
Using the touch panel keys
Playback screen (page 1)
7
9
a
8
65432
1
Playback screen (page 2)
f
e
d
cb
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is inva-
lid.
1 Switches the media file type played
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types, you can switch be-
tween media file types to play.
Tap the key repeatedly to switch between the
following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) ROM (com-
pressed audio file) DivX (DivX video files)
2 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on page 108.
3 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
4 Switches the information
Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-
formation panel as follows:
Disc information display Current folder
name display Current file name display
5 Switches to the next page of touch panel
keys
6 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
7 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-
tion of the current video
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.
En
106
Chapter
20
Playing a DivX video
p If you want to display the touch panel
keys and information of the current
video again, touch anywhere on the LCD
screen.
8 Skips forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching it twice quickly will
skip to the previous file.
9 Stops playback
When [g] is touched once to stop playback,
playback can be resumed from the stopped
position. When [g] is touched two times to
stop playback, playback returns to the begin-
ning.
a Selects a file from the list
Touching the key displays the list which lets
you find file names or folder names on a disc.
p A dash () is displayed if there is no cor-
responding information.
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.
= For details, refer to Operating list screens
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 74.
The contents of the folder in which the cur-
rently playing file is located are displayed.
Touching
displays the content of the upper
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder
is listed,
cannot be used.
b Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-
back on this page.
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback
on this page.
c Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [m]or[n] to perform fast
reverse or forward.
If you keep touching [m]or[n] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f] or opposite key of [m]or[n] which
you touched.
d Changes the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the
subtitle languages recorded on the disc.
e Changes audio tracks (Multi-audio)
Each touch of [Audio] switches between
audio tracks.
f Searches for a desired scene and starts
playback from a specified time
= For details, refer to Starting playback
from a specified time on the next page.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during pause.
% Touch [r] during pause.
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead
one frame.
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
% Touch and hold [r] until
is dis-
played during playback.
The icon
is displayed, and forward slow
motion playback begins.
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]
or [m], etc.
p There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
p With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
En
107
Chapter
20
Playing a DivX video
Playing a DivX video
Starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for a desired scene by specify-
ing the time.
p Time search are not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
1 Touch [Search].
2 Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
! To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].
To cancel the input numbers, touch and
hold [Clear].
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip files forward or backward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the DivX screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2
1 Changes the repeat range
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
! Disc: Plays throughout the current disc.
! File: Repeats just the current file.
! Folder: Repeats just the current folder.
p If you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to
Disc.
p If you perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward during File, the repeat play range
changes to Folder.
p When Folder is selected, it is not pos-
sible to playback a subfolder of that
folder.
p When playing discs with compressed
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-
peat play is performed within DivX vi-
deos even if Disc is selected.
2 DVD setup adjustments
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/
DivX® Setup menu on the next
page.
En
108
Chapter
20
Playing a DivX video
This chapter describes how to configure the
DVD-Video/DivX player.
Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup
menu
1 Play the disc that contains DVD-Video
or DivX.
2 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
3 Touch .
The Function menu appears.
4 Touch [DVD/DivX® Setup].
The DVD/DivX® Setup screen appears.
5 Touch the desired function.
Setting the top-priority
languages
You can assign the top-priority language to the
top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial
playback. If the selected language is recorded
on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-
played or output in that language.
1 Display the DVD/DivX® Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®
Setup menu on this page.
2 Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-
guage] or [Menu Language].
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-
rently set language is selected.
3 Touch the desired language.
When you select Others, a language code
input display is shown. Input the four-digit
code of the desired language then touch
[Enter].
= For details, refer to Language code chart for
DVDs on page 112.
p If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the default language specified on
the disc is output and displayed.
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio
language by touching [S.Title]or[Audio]
during playback.
Even if you touch [S.Title]or[Audio]to
switch the subtitle or audio language, this
setting will not change.
Setting the angle icon display
You can set the angle icon to display in
scenes where the angle can be switched.
1 Display the DVD/DivX® Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®
Setup menu on this page.
2 Touch [Multi Angle].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! On (default):
Displays the angle icon in scenes where the
angle can be switched.
! Off:
Hides the angle icon.
En
109
Chapter
21
DVD-Video or DivX setup
DVD-Video or DivX setup
Setting the aspect ratio
There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend
use of this function only when you want to fit it
to the rear display.)
p When using a regular display, select either
Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting
16:9 may result in an unnatural image.
1 Display the DVD/DivX® Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®
Setup menu on the previous page.
2 Touch [TVAspect].
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting
as follows:
! 16:9: Wide screen image (16:9) is displayed
as it is (initial setting).
! Letter Box: The image is in the shape of a
letter box with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen.
! Panscan: The image is cut short at the right
and left of the screen.
p When playing discs that do not have a pan-
scan system, the disc is played back with
Letter Box even if you select Panscan
setting. Confirm whether the disc package
bears the
mark.
p Some discs do not enable changing of the
TV aspect. For details, refer to the discs in-
structions.
Setting the parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot
watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You
can set the parental lock level in steps as de-
sired.
p When you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code
number input indications may be dis-
played. In this case, playback will begin
when the correct code number is input.
Setting the code number and level
When you first use this function, register your
code number. If you do not register a code
number, parental lock will not operate.
1 Display the DVD/DivX® Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®
Setup menu on the previous page.
2 Touch [Parental Level].
3 Touch [0] to [9] to input a four-digit
code number.
4 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The code number is registered, and you can
now set the level.
5 Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-
sired level.
The parental lock level is set.
! Level 8: Playback of the entire disc is possi-
ble (initial setting).
! Level 7 to Level 2: Playback of discs for
children and non-adult oriented discs is
possible.
! Level 1: Only playback of discs for children
is possible.
p If you want to change the parental level al-
ready set, enter the registered code number
and then select the parental level.
p We recommend that you keep a record of
your code number in case you forget it.
p The parental lock level is recorded on the
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the
disc package, the included literature or the
disc itself. You cannot use parental lock
with discs that do not feature a recorded
parental lock level.
p With some discs, parental lock operates to
skip certain scenes only, after which normal
playback resumes. For details, refer to the
discs instructions.
En
110
Chapter
21
DVD-Video or DivX setup
p If you forget the registered code number,
touch
10 times on the number input
screen. The registered code number is can-
celed, letting you register a new one.
Setting the auto play
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-
cally and start playback from the first chapter
of the first title.
p This function is available for DVD-Video.
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If
this function is not fully operable, turn this
function off and start playback.
1 Display the DVD/DivX® Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®
Setup menu on page 109.
2 Touch [Auto Play].
Each touch of [Auto Play] changes the set-
tings as follows:
! Off (default):
Deactivates the auto play function.
! On:
Activates the auto play function.
p When Auto Play is set to On, the repeat
range is automatically set to Disc.
Setting the subtitle file for
DivX
You can select whether to display DivX exter-
nal subtitles or not.
p If no DivX external subtitle files exist, the
original DivX subtitles are displayed even
when Custom is selected.
1 Display the DVD/DivX® Setup screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®
Setup menu on page 109.
2 Touch [Subtitle File].
Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting
between Original and Custom.
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,
the line breaks and the characters are dis-
played on the next line.
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on
one screen. If more than 126 characters are
set, the excess characters will not be dis-
played.
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-
responding subtitle files exist.
p Up to three subtitle lines can be displayed
at once.
En
111
Chapter
21
DVD-Video or DivX setup
DVD-Video or DivX setup
Language code chart for DVDs
Two-letter
code,
input code
Language
Two-letter
code,
input code
Language
Two-letter
code,
input code
Language
aa, 0101 Afar ia, 0901 Interlingua rn, 1814 Rundi
ab, 0102 Abkhazian ie, 0905 Interlingue ro, 1815 Romanian
af, 0106 Afrikaans ik, 0911 Inupiaq ru, 1821 Russian
am, 0113 Amharic in, 0914 Indonesian rw, 1823 Kinyarwanda
ar, 0118 Arabic is, 0919 Icelandic sa, 1901 Sanskrit
as, 0119 Assamese it, 0920 Italian sd, 1904 Sindhi
ay, 0125 Aymara ja, 1001 Japanese sg, 1907 Sango
az, 0126 Azerbaijani ji, 1009 Yiddish sh, 1908 Serbo-Croatian
ba, 0201 Bashkir jw, 1023 Javanese si, 1909 Sinhala
be, 0205 Belarusian ka, 1101 Georgian sk, 1911 Slovak
bg, 0207 Bulgarian kk, 1111 Kazakh sl, 1912 Slovenian
bh, 0208 Bihari kl, 1112 Kalaallisut sm, 1913 Samoan
bi, 0209 Bislama km, 1113 Central Khmer sn, 1914 Shona
bn, 0214 Bengali kn, 1114 Kannada so, 1915 Somali
bo, 0215 Tibetan ko, 1115 Korean sq, 1917 Albanian
br, 0218 Breton ks, 1119 Kashmiri sr, 1918 Serbian
ca, 0301 Catalan ku, 1121 Kurdish ss, 1919 Swati
co, 0315 Corsican ky, 1125 Kirghiz; Kyrgyz st, 1920 Sotho, Southern
cs, 0319 Czech la, 1201 Latin su, 1921 Sundanese
cy, 0325 Welsh ln, 1214 Lingala sv, 1922 Swedish
da, 0401 Danish lo, 1215 Lao sw, 1923 Swahili
de, 0405 German lt, 1220 Lithuanian ta, 2001 Tamil
dz, 0426 Dzongkha lv, 1222 Latvian te, 2005 Telugu
ee, 0505 Ewe mg, 1307 Malagasy tg, 2007 Tajik
el, 0512 Greek mi, 1309 Maori th, 2008 Thai
en, 0514 English mk, 1311 Macedonian ti, 2009 Tigrinya
eo, 0515 Esperanto ml, 1312 Malayalam tk, 2011 Turkmen
es, 0519 Spanish mn, 1314 Mongoli an tl, 2012 Tagalog
et, 0520 Estonian mo, 1315 Moldavian tn, 2014 Tswana
eu, 0521 Basque mr, 1318 Marathi to, 2015 Tonga
fa, 0601 Persian ms, 1319 Malay tr, 2018 Turkish
fi, 0609 Finnish mt, 1320 Maltese ts, 2019 Tsonga
fj, 0610 Fijian my, 1325 Burmese tt, 2020 Tatar
fo, 0615 Faroese na, 1401 Nauru tw, 2023 Twi
fr, 0618 French ne, 1405 Nepali uk, 2111 Ukrainian
fy, 0625 Western Frisian nl, 1412 Dutch; Flemish ur, 2118 Urdu
ga, 0701 Irish no, 1415 Norwegian uz, 2126 Uzbek
gd, 0704 Gaelic oc, 1503 Occitan vi, 2209 Vietnamese
gl, 0712 Galician om, 1513 Oromo vo, 2215 Volapuk
gn, 0714 Guarani or, 1518 Oriya wo, 2315 Wolof
gu, 0721 Gujarati pa, 1601 Panjabi; Punjabi xh, 2408 Xhosa
ha, 0801 Hausa pl, 1612 Polish yo, 2515 Yoruba
hi, 0809 Hindi ps, 1619 Pushto; Pashto zh, 2608 Chinese
hr, 0818 Croatian pt, 1620 Portuguese zu, 2621 Zulu
hu, 0821 Hungarian qu, 1721 Quechua
hy, 0825 Arme nian rm, 1813 Romansh
En
112
Chapter
21
DVD-Video or DivX setup
You can play the compressed audio files
stored in the external storage device (USB,
SD).
p In the following description, the SD mem-
or y card and USB memory device are col-
lectively referred to as the external storage
device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB
memory device only, it is referred to as the
USB storage device.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD
card slot or plug the USB storage device
into the USB connector.
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-
rage device on page 22.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an
SD memory card on page 18.
p Playback is performed in order of folder
numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-
tain no playable files. If there are no play-
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback
starts from folder 02.
3 Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of
the screen to display the USB or SD
screen.
4 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the external storage device
(USB, SD).
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys (Music) on page 115.
Reading the screen
1
2
3
4
5
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some external storage devices.
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-
rage device compliant with Mass Storage
Class. For details about the USB Class,
refer to the manual supplied with the USB
storage device.
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 Playback condition indicator
Indicates the current playback condition.
Scanning folders and files
Indicator Meaning
Cancels the scan play.
Plays the first audio files of each
folder for about 10 seconds
when the repeat range is set to
Media.
Plays the beginning of each
audio file in the current folder
for about 10 seconds when the
repeat range is set to Folder.
Playing files in random order
Indicator Meaning
Does not play files in random
order.
Plays all audio files in the cur-
rent repeat play range in ran-
dom order.
En
113
Chapter
22
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
Setting a repeat play range
Indicator Meaning
Repeats all compressed audio
files in the selected external sto-
rage device (USB, SD).
Repeats just the current file.
Repeats the current folder.
3 Current file information
! : Folder name
Shows the folder name currently play-
ing.
!
: Artist name
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available).
!
: Album title
Shows the title of the album of the cur-
rent file (when available).
!
: Track title
Shows the title of the track currently
playing (when available).
p If the title of a track is not available,
the file name appears.
! Play time
Shows the elapsed playing time within
the current file.
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
4 Current time
5 File information
! File number indicator
! File name indicator
! File type indicator
Shows the type of audio files.
En
114
Chapter
22
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
Using the touch panel keys (Music)
9
8
7
2
56
4
13
1 Scans folders and files
Scan play is performed by touching only one
key.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Scans folders and files on the next
page.
2 Plays files in random order
The files in the current repeat play range can
be played at random by touching only one key.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Plays files in random order on the
next page.
3 Sets a repeat play range
The repeat play range can be changed by
touching only one key.
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat
range on the next page.
4 Selects a file to play
Scrolling the keys up or down displays files,
and tapping a file starts playback.
Tapping the lower key during random play-
back skips to the next file. Tapping the upper
key jumps to the start of the current file.
5 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
6 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on the next page.
7 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
8 Selects a file from the list
Touching the key displays the list which lets
you find track titles or folder names on an ex-
ternal storage device (USB, SD).
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.
= For details, refer to Operating list screens
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 74.
Touching displays the content of the upper
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder
is listed,
cannot be used.
En
115
Chapter
22
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
9 Switches the operation screen
Tapping this key switches between the screen
to operate music files and the screen to oper-
ate video files. This touch panel key is avail-
able only when there are both audio and video
files in the external storage device (USB,
SD).
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip files forward or backward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the USB or SD screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2 3
1 Changes the repeat range
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
! Media: Repeats all compressed audio
files in the selected external storage de-
vice (USB, SD).
! Track: Repeats just the current file.
! Folder: Repeats the current folder.
p If you skip the file forward or backward
when the repeat play range in Track,
the repeat play range changes to
Folder.
2 Plays files in random order
Random play lets you playback files in ran-
dom order within the current repeat range.
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.
p If you turn the random play on when the
repeat play range is set to Track, the
repeat play range changes to Folder
automatically.
3 Scans folders and files
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds
of each file. Scan play is performed in the
current repeat play range.
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off.
When you find the file you want, touch
[Scan] to turn the scan play off.
p After all files or folders scanning are fin-
ished, normal playback will begin again.
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-
peat play range is set to Track, the re-
peat play range changes to Folder
automatically.
En
116
Chapter
22
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
You can play the video files stored in the exter-
nal storage device (USB, SD).
p In the following description, the SD mem-
or y card and USB memory device are col-
lectively referred to as the external storage
device (USB, SD). If it indicates the USB
memory device only, it is referred to as the
USB storage device.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD
card slot or plug the USB storage device
into the USB connector.
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-
rage device on page 22.
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an
SD memory card on page 18.
p Playback is performed in order of folder
numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-
tain no playable files. If there are no play-
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback
starts from folder 02.
3 Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of
the screen to display the USB or SD
screen.
4 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
5 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the external storage device
(USB, SD).
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys (Video) on the next page.
Reading the screen
8
7
41 2 3 5
6
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some external storage devices.
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-
rage device compliant with Mass Storage
Class. For details about the USB Class,
refer to the manual supplied with the USB
storage device.
1 Folder number indicator
2 File number indicator
3 Current folder name indicator
Shows the folder name currently playing.
4 File name indicator
Shows the file name currently playing.
5 Current time
6 File type indicator
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.
7 Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current file.
8 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
En
117
Chapter
23
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Using the touch panel keys (Video)
1
342
9
8
7
56
1 Switches the operation screen
Tapping this key switches between the screen
to operate music files and the screen to oper-
ate video files. This touch panel key is avail-
able only when there are both audio and video
files in the external storage device (USB, SD).
2 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on the next page.
3 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
4 Searches for a desired scene and starts
playback from a specified time
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a
specified time on the next page.
5 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
6 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-
tion of the current video
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.
p If you want to display the touch panel
keys and information of the current
video again, touch anywhere on the LCD
screen.
7 Skips forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching it twice quickly will
skip to the previous file.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast reverse
or fast forward.
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-
ward.
8 Selects a file from the list
You can select and play the title you want from
the list.
= For details, refer to Operating list screens
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 74.
The contents of the folder in which the cur-
rently playing file is located are displayed.
Touching
displays the content of the upper
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder
is listed,
cannot be used.
En
118
Chapter
23
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
9 Stops playback
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for a desired scene by specify-
ing the time.
1 Touch [Search].
2 Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
! To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.
! To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].
To cancel the input numbers, touch and
hold [Clear].
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip files forward or backward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward.
Using advanced functions
1 Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of
the screen to display the USB or SD
screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch
.
The Function menu appears.
p If the touch panel keys are not shown,
touch anywhere on the screen to display
them.
1 2
1 Changes the repeat range
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
! Media: Repeats all video files in the se-
lected external storage device (USB,
SD).
! File: Repeats just the current file.
! Folder: Repeats the current folder.
p If you skip the file forward or backward
when the repeat play range in File, the
repeat play range changes to Folder.
2 Changes the screen size of video
If a video file is played, you can select the
display mode between normal and full
screen.
Each touch of [Video Output Setting]
changes the setting as follows:
! Normal: Enlarges the display size while
maintaining the aspect ratio.
! Full: Displays the image full-screen
although the aspect ratio may be
changed.
En
119
Chapter
23
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-
tion system.
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU51V)
(sold separately) is required for connection.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Connect your iPod.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on
page 22.
p If the iPod is already connected, tap [iPod]
on the left edge of the screen.
= For details, refer to Selecting a source
on page 74.
p If you connect the iPhone or iPod touch,
quit applications before connecting.
p If no video is output when iPod is selected
as AV source, check the setting in AV1
Input on the AV System Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1
(AV1) on page 178.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control your iPod.
= For details of the operation, refer to Using
the touch panel keys on page 122.
Reading the screen
Music
6
5
1
2
3
4
Video
6
7
17 3
1 Playback condition indicator
Indicates the current playback condition.
Setting the shuffle play
Indicator Meaning
Cancels the shuffle play.
Plays back songs or videos in
random order within the se-
lected list.
Selects an album randomly, and
then plays back all songs in that
album in order.
The actions while this indicator
is displayed on the video opera-
tion screen vary depending on
the connected iPod.
En
120
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Setting a repeat play range
Indicator Meaning
Repeats all songs or videos in
the selected list.
Repeats just the current song or
video.
2 Current song (episode) information
! : Artist name (podcast title)
Shows the artist name currently playing.
When a podcast is played, the podcast
title is displayed (when available).
!
: Album title (release date)
Shows the title of the album for the
song. When a podcast is played, the re-
lease date is displayed (when available).
!
: Song title (episode)
Shows the title of the current song.
When a podcast is played, the episode
is displayed (when available).
!
: Chapter number
Shows the current chapter number and
total number of chapters when the file
with chapters played (when available).
! Play time
Shows the elapsed playing time within
the current song (episode).
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
3 Current time
4 Song (episode) information
! Song number indicator
Shows the number of the song and the
total number of songs in the selected
list.
! Song title (episode) indicator
! Album artwork
Album art of the current song is dis-
played if it is available.
5 Genre indicator
Shows the genre of the current song.
6 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
7 Current video information
! : Chapter number
Shows the current chapter number
when the video with chapters played
(when available).
!
: Artist name (podcast title)
Shows the artist name currently playing.
When a podcast is played, the podcast
title is displayed (when available).
!
: File number indicator
Shows the number of the file currently
playing (when available).
! File name indicator
Shows the file name currently playing
(when available).
! Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within
the current file.
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
p If characters recorded on the iPod are not
compatible with this navigation system,
they may turn into garbled characters.
En
121
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using the touch panel keys
Music
e
c
d
b
a
2
89
4
1 3
7 6 5
Video
e
89
f
h 6 ag
1 Sets the shuffle play for music
The shuffle play setting can be changed by
touching only one key.
= For details, refer to Sets the shuffle
play for music on page 130.
2 Sets a repeat play range
The repeat play range can be changed by
touching only one key.
= For details, refer to Sets repeat play on
page 130.
3 Displays the MusicSphere screen
En
122
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Touching the key displays the MusicSphere
screen, and a playlist created with the PC ap-
plication (MusicSphere) can be played.
= For details, refer to Playing Music-
Sphere on page 130.
4 Selects a song to play
Scrolling the keys up or down displays songs,
and tapping a song starts playback.
Tapping the lower key during shuffle playback
skips to the next song. Tapping the upper key
once skip to the start of the current song. Tap-
ping it again will skip to the previous song.
When the song with chapters played, chapter
can be skipped back and forward.
5 Displays the genre list
6 Switches the control mode of iPod func-
tions
Touching the key lets you control the functions
of an iPod connected to the navigation system
from the iPod.
= For details, refer to Operating the func-
tions from your iPod on page 128.
Displays the operation screen of applica-
tion for iPhone
= For details, refer to Operating an applica-
tion for iPhone from the navigation sys-
tem on page 126.
7 Displays the top category menu
Touching the key displays the top category for
song playback.
Displays the previously selected list
If you select the song from the list to play after
touching
, touching the key displays the pre-
vious list.
8 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
9 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on page 130.
a Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
b Displays the song list
c Displays the album list
d Displays the artist list
e Displays the top category menu
Touching the key displays the top category
menu for song or video playback.
Switches the operation screen
Tapping this key displays the touch panel key
([Video]or[Music]) to switch between the
screen to operate video files and the screen to
operate music files.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Starting the video playback on the next
page.
p This touch panel key is available only
when there are both audio and video file
in your iPod.
p Touching [Video]or[Music] on the list
screens enables you to perform the
equivalent operation.
f Skips back or forward to another video
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
video. Touching [o] once skips to the start
of the current video. Touching again will skip
to the previous video. When the video with
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back
and forward.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast reverse
or fast forward.
If you keep touching [o]or[p] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [o]or[p].
g Hides the touch panel keys and informa-
tion of the current video
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.
p If you want to display the touch panel
keys and information of the current
video again, touch anywhere on the LCD
screen.
En
123
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using an iPod (iPod)
h Displays the top category menu for video
Touching the key displays the top category for
video playback.
Displays the previously selected list
If you select the video from the list to play
after touching
, touching the key displays
the previous list.
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip songs, videos or podcasts for-
ward or backward.
When the song, video or podcast with chapter
played, you can skip chapter forward or back-
ward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward.
Starting the video playback
This navigation system can play video if an
iPod with video capabilities is connected.
1 Touch [iPod] on the left edge of the
screen to display the touch panel key to
switch to a video source.
2 Tap [Music].
A list of videos by category appears.
3 Tap one of the categories in that con-
tains the video you want to play.
4 Tap your desired item on the list to nar-
row down them until the video list ap-
pears.
= For details, refer to Narrowing down a song
or video with the list on this page.
5 On the video list, tap the video you
want to play.
Video playback will start.
6 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
= For details of the operation, refer to Using
the touch panel keys on page 122.
Narrowing down a song or
video with the list
Tapping an item on list allows you to search
for a song or video and play it in your iPod.
1 Display a list screen.
= For details, refer to Displays the genre list
on the previous page.
= For details, refer to Displays the song list
on the previous page.
= For details, refer to Displays the album
list on the previous page.
= For details, refer to Displays the artist list
on the previous page.
# If you touch
, the top category menu screen
is displayed. Tap the category of your preference.
En
124
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
2 Scroll by dragging tabs up or down to
display the character that you want to re-
fine.
Character tabs
3 Tap the tab to select the character and
display the page which includes applicable
options.
p An article listed below and space at the be-
ginning of the artist name will be ignored
and the next character will be taken into ac-
count for searching.
! A or a
! AN, An,oran
! THE, The,orthe
4 Scroll the list by dragging items up or
down to display the item you want to se-
lect.
Refine the item until the song title (episode) is
displayed on the list.
p Tapping [All] on the list includes all options
in the current list. For example, if you tap
[All] after tapping [Artists], you can pro-
ceed to the next screen with all artists in
the list selected.
p After you select artists, albums, genres,
podcasts, or composers, go on to touch
and hold one of the list to start playing the
first song in the selected list and display the
next hierarchy.
5 On the song (episode) or video list, tap
the song (episode) or video you want to
play.
p After you select the song (episode) or video
using this function, touching
displays
the list previously selected.
En
125
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using an iPod (iPod)
Operating an application
for iPhone from the
navigation system
WARNING
Certain uses of a smartphone may not be
legal while driving in your jurisdiction, so
you must be aware of and obey any such re-
strictions.
If in doubt as to a particular function, only
perform it while the car is parked.
No feature should be used unless it is safe to
do so under the driving conditions you are
experiencing.
This navigation system can switch to the Ad-
vanced App Mode, which you can display
and operate the application for iPhone on the
screen.
In Advanced App Mode, you can operate ap-
plications with finger gestures such as tap-
ping, dragging, scrolling or flicking on the
screen of the navigation system.
p Be sure to read Using app-based connected
content before you perform this operation.
= For details, refer to Using app-based con-
nected content on page 224.
! Pioneer is not liable for any issues that may
arise from incorrect or flawed app-based
content.
! The content and functionality of the sup-
ported applications are the responsibility of
the App providers.
! In Advanced App Mode, functionality
through the product is limited while driving,
with available functions determined by the
App providers.
! Availability of Advanced App Mode func-
tionality is determined by the App provider,
and not determined by Pioneer.
! Advanced App Mode allows access to ap-
plications other than those listed (subject
to limitations while driving), but the extent
to which content can be used is determined
by the App providers.
This function can be operated with the follow-
ing iPhone models:
! iPod touch 4th generation
! iPhone 4S
! iPhone 4
p Applications operable by switching this na-
vigation system to Advanced App Mode
are only those available for Advanced App
Mode.
Please check iPhone applications sup-
ported Advanced App Mode at
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/
AppRadio
p The compatible finger gestures vary de-
pending on the application for iPhone.
Starting procedure
1 Display the operation screen of the
iPhone.
= For details of the operation, refer to Starting
procedure on page 120.
2 Start an application available for Ad-
vanced App Mode from the iPhone.
An image of the application is displayed on
the screen of this navigation system.
p You can start an application available for
Advanced App Mode also from a launcher
application.
3 Touch to hide the AV source icons or
wait until the source icons disappear.
p If the source icons are displayed, you can-
not conduct the operation of application on
the screen.
4 Operate the application.
5 Touch the
key to go back to the op-
eration screen of the iPhone.
En
126
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using the touch panel keys
1
2
3
4
5
1 Displays the Function menu
2 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
3 Switches to the normal mode
Tapping the key displays the operation screen
of iPhone.
4 Starts the AppRadio app
Tapping the key starts AppRadio app, which
is a launcher application for applications
available for Advanced App Mode.
p To use the AppRadio app in this naviga-
tion system, install the application to
the iPhone in advance.
For details about the AppRadio app,
visit the following site:
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/
AppRadio
p In some iPhone modes, selecting a
source may start up an application for
iPhone. If the message Please check
your smartphone screen when it is
safe and lawful for you to do so. ap-
pears, start up the application from your
iPhone.
5 Displays the AV source icons
Tapping the key shows the AV source icons.
p If you touch , switches to . If you
touch
, the AV source icons are hid-
den and
switches to .
Using the keyboard
CAUTION
For your safety, the keyboard functionality is only
available when the vehicle is stopped and the
parking brake is engaged.
p Keyboard is available only in Advanced
App Mode.
When you tap a text input area of an applica-
tion for iPhone, a keyboard will be displayed
on-screen. You can input the desired text di-
rectly from this navigation system.
p The language preference for the keyboard
of this navigation system should be same
as the setting on your iPhone.
If the settings for this product and the
iPhone are different, you may not be able to
enter characters properly.
1 Set language preference for the key-
board of the iPhone.
2 Display the operation screen of the
iPhone.
= For details of the operation, refer to Starting
procedure on page 120.
3 Touch .
4 Touch
.
The Function menu appears.
5 Touch [Keyboard].
The Select Keyboard screen appears.
6 Touch the desired language.
After the language is selected, the previous
screen returns.
7 Tap the text input area on the applica-
tion screen of the iPhone.
The keyboard for entering the text appears.
En
127
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using an iPod (iPod)
1
2
345
56
7
1 Enters the characters
2 Deletes the input text one letter at a
time, beginning at the end of the text
3 Confirms the entry and allows you to
proceed to the next step
4 Hides the keyboard and text can now
be entered using the keyboard of
iPhone
5 Changes the iPhone keyboard layout
p The iPhone keyboard layouts that can be
selected by tapping
depends on the
setting of Hardware Keyboard Layout of
your iPhone.
6 Switches to a keyboard offering nu-
meric and symbol characters
7 Converts the case of the keyboard char-
acters
When using an application not
compatible with Advanced App
Mode
When an application not compatible with Ad-
vanced App Mode is started, depending on
the application, you can operate it with the
touch panel key displayed. However, the beha-
vior when touching the key depends on the ap-
plication.
Also, the display of images on the screen of
this navigation system depends on the appli-
cation.
1 Display the operation screen of the
iPhone.
= For details of the operation, refer to Starting
procedure on page 120.
2 Touch .
The operation of music or video sources is
switched to your iPhone.
3 Start an application from the iPhone.
4 Touch the
key to go back to the op-
eration screen of the iPhone.
Operating the functions
from your iPod
You can switch operation of the music or
video sources to your iPod.
p The following operations can be performed
from the navigation system even if other
operations are performed from your iPod.
! Playback and Pause
! Fast reverse or forward
! Skip forward or backward
! Adjusting the volume
p Sound is output from the speakers of your
vehicle even if the iPod operations is per-
formed from your iPod.
Starting procedure
1 Display the operation screen of the
iPod.
= For details of the operation, refer to Starting
procedure on page 120.
2 Touch .
The operation of music or video sources is
switched to your iPod.
3 Operate the music or video sources
with iPod.
4 Touch the
key to go back to the op-
eration screen of the iPod.
En
128
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using the touch panel keys
1
2
3
4
5
1 Displays the Function menu
2 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
3 Switches to the normal mode
Tapping the key displays the operation screen
of iPod.
4 Hides the AV source icons
Tapping the key shows only the current image.
p If you touch , switches to . If you
touch
, the AV source icons are dis-
played and
switches to .
5 Operates the iPod
The operations activated by touching vary de-
pending on the connected iPod.
En
129
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using an iPod (iPod)
Playing MusicSph ere
You can play playlists created with the PC ap-
plication (MusicSphere) using an exciting gra-
phic interface.
p PC application (MusicSphere) will be avail-
able on our website.
Starting procedure
1 Display the music operation screen of
the iPod.
= For details of the operation, refer to Starting
procedure on page 120.
2 Touch .
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
plays the MusicSphere screen on page
122.
Reading the screen
1
2
3
4
3
5
1 Category name and total number of songs
Shows the category name and the total num-
ber of playable songs in the playlist currently
selected.
2 Song title indicator
Shows six songs including the first song
played after selecting the playlist.
3 Playlist name indicator
Shows the name of the playlist currently se-
lected.
4 Current time
5 Category name
Shows the category name in the playlist.
Using the touch panel keys
1
2
1 Switches to the AV operation screen
2 Plays the playlist
Tapping a key moves the playlist to the center
of the screen, and tapping the center key
starts playback.
p To change the playlist to be displayed,
rotate the sphere by dragging the keys
up, down, left, or right.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the iPod screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2 3 4
5
6
1 Sets repeat play
There are two repeat play types for play-
back.
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
! All: Repeats all songs or videos in the
selected list.
! One: Repeats just the current song or
video.
2 Sets the shuffle play for music
En
130
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
This function shuffles songs or albums and
plays them in random order.
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting
as follows:
! Off: Does not shuffle.
! Songs: Plays back songs or videos in
random order within the selected list.
! Albums: Selects an album randomly,
and then plays back all songs in that
album in order.
3 Sets the audiobook play speed
While listening to an audiobook on iPod,
playback speed can be changed.
Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the
setting as follows:
! Normal: Playback in normal speed
! Faster: Playback faster than normal
speed
! Slower: Playback slower than normal
speed
4 Plays video in wide screen mode
If the video is compatible with wide screen
format, set Widescreen to On in order
to view the video image in the wide screen.
Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the
setting as follows:
! On: Outputs the wide-screen video from
an iPod.
! Off: Outputs the normal-sized video
from an iPod.
p Display size is changed after you
change Widescreen setting and select
the video to play.
p This setting is available only during the
video operation.
5 Plays songs related to the currently
playing song
You can play songs related to the currently
playing song, using of the following lists.
! Link Artists: Songs related to the cur-
rently playing artist will be played in the
album order.
! Link Albums: Songs related to the cur-
rently playing album will be played.
! Link Genres: Songs related to the cur-
rently playing genre will be played in the
artist order.
6 Selects the display language of the key-
board
You can select the display language of the
keyboard used in Advanced App Mode.
p This setting is available only when you
change the screen of the navigation sys-
tem to the screen of the application for
iPhone.
En
131
Chapter
24
Using an iPod (iPod)
Using an iPod (iPod)
WARNING
Certain uses of a smartphone may not be
legal while driving in your jurisdiction, so
you must be aware of and obey any such re-
strictions.
If in doubt as to a particular function, only
perform it while the car is parked.
No feature should be used unless it is safe to
do so under the driving conditions you are
experiencing.
When connecting smartphone with applica-
tions installed, you can control, view, and/or
hear application content from this navigation
system.
p In this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch will
be referred to as iPhone.
In this navigation system, you can use the fol-
lowing applications.
! Pandora
®
internet
! Aha Radio
p Be sure to read Using app-based connected
content before you perform this operation.
= For details, refer to Using app-based con-
nected content on page 224.
p Even if you switch to another source while
listening to Aha Radio contents, playback
of the contents continues when you switch
back to the Aha Radio source.
p When you are talking on a cellular phone
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth wireless technology, playback
content is paused temporarily. Playback re-
sumes when you finish talking.
Information for the
smartphone compatibility
The following devices can use this function.
! iPhone and iPod touch
! Android
device
! BlackBerry
®
device
The following applications are supported by
the respective smartphones.
iPhone Android
BlackBer-
ry
Pandora
®
internet 11 1
Aha Radio 11
Followings are the detailed information regard-
ing the terminals required to use the Aha
Radio application on this navigation system.
For iPhone users
! The device has iOS 3.0 or higher.
! USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU51V)
(sold separately) is required to connect
your iPhone to this navigation system.
For Android device users
! The following conditions apply to use of
this function.
The device has Android OS 2.2 or high-
er.
The device supports Bluetooth SPP (Se-
rial Port Profile).
p Compatibility with all Android devices is
not guaranteed.
For details about Android device com-
patibility with this navigation system,
refer to the information on our website.
! The device is connected to this navigation
system via Bluetooth.
For BlackBerry device users
! The following conditions apply to use of
this function.
The device has BlackBerry OS 4.3 or
higher.
The device supports Bluetooth SPP (Se-
rial Port Profile).
p Compatibility with all BlackBerry de-
vices is not guaranteed.
For details about BlackBerry device
compatibility with this navigation
system, refer to the information on
our website.
! The device is connected to this navigation
system via Bluetooth.
En
132
Chapter
25
Using smartphone applications
Starting procedure
The procedure varies depending on your type
of smartphone.
For Android device and
BlackBerry device users
1 Register the device in this navigation
system.
p When registering the device, you must se-
lect either Handsfree and Audio or
Audio.
p The registered device must be selected as
the priority device.
= For details, refer to Registering your
Bluetooth devices on page 59.
2 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
3 Touch [App Connection] and set to
Bluetooth.
p This key is not available when an Aha Radio
source has already been selected.
4 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
5 Tap [Pandora] or [aha] on the left side
of the screen to display Pandora or aha
screen.
When you tap [Pandora]or[aha], the naviga-
tion system attempts to establish the
Bluetooth connection.
After the connection is successfully estab-
lished, the touch panel keys on the Pandora
or aha screen are activated.
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 74.
6 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the Pandora or Aha Radio.
= For details, refer to Using Pandora
®
internet
radio on the next page.
= For details, refer to Using Aha Radio on
page 136.
For iPhone users
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
2 Touch [App Connection] and set to
Wired.
p This key is not available when an Aha Radio
source has already been selected.
3 Start up the Pandora or Aha application
installed on the iPhone.
p In some iPhone modes, selecting a source
may start up an iPhone application. If the
message Please check your smartphone
screen when it is safe and lawful for you
to do so. appears, start up the application
from your iPhone.
p Before starting up, sign-in to Pandora from
your iPhone.
4 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
En
133
Chapter
25
Using smartphone applications
Using smartphone applications
5 Connect your iPhone.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on
page 22.
p If the iPod is already connected, tap
[Pandora]or[aha] on the left edge of the
screen.
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on
page 74.
6 Tap [Pandora] or [aha] on the left side
of the screen to display Pandora or aha
screen.
7 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the Pandora or Aha Radio.
= For details, refer to Using Pandora
®
internet
radio on this page.
= For details, refer to Using Aha Radio on
page 136.
Using Pandora
®
internet radio
You can experience Pandora by connecting an
smartphone that has the Pandora application
installed.
Note:
! Certain functionality of the Pandora service is
not available when accessing the service
through the Pioneer navigation system, in-
cluding, but not limited to, creating new sta-
tions, deleting stations, emailing current
stations, buying songs from iTunes, viewing
additional text information, logging in to
Pandora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio
Quality.
! Pandora internet radio is a music service not
affiliated with Pioneer. More information is
available at
http://www.pandora.com
! To insure compatibility, install the latest ver-
sion of the Pandora
®
internet radio application
by navigating to
www.pandora.com on your mobile device.
Reading the screen
4
1
2
3
1 Current song information
! Station name indicator
Shows the Pandora station name the
tuner is currently tuned in.
!
: Artist name
Shows the artist name currently playing.
!
: Album title
Shows the title of the album of the cur-
rent track.
!
: Track title
Shows the title of the current track.
! Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within
the current track.
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
2 Current time
3 Album artwork
Album art of the current track is displayed if it
is available.
4 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
En
134
Chapter
25
Using smartphone applications
Using the touch panel keys
1
7
6
4 235
1 Selects a Pandora station from the list
Touching the key displays the list of your
Pandora stations to select one of them to play.
= For details, refer to Operating list screens
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 74.
Scroll the list by dragging items up or down to
display the item you want to select.
p Touching [QuickMix] plays only one
track based on particular musical char-
acteristics at a time from shuffled sev-
eral stations.
p Stations indicated by
are shared sta-
tions.
p Each time you touch [List] changes the
sort order.
Current order is indicated on the upper
right of the screen.
!
:
You can sort the items in the list al-
phabetically.
!
:
You can sort the items in the list in
order of dates the items were cre-
ated.
2 Thumbs Up
Touching the key gives Thumbs Up to the
track currently playing.
p This function is not available when
using a shared station.
3 Thumbs Down
Touching the key gives Thumbs Down to the
track currently playing and skip to the next
track.
p This function is not available when
using a shared station.
4 Bookmark
Touching the key displays the screen which
lets you select the artist or track to add book-
marks.
5 Connecting a registered Bluetooth device
manually
p This is displayed when App Connec-
tion is set to Bluetooth.
= For details, refer to Starting procedure on
page 133.
En
135
Chapter
25
Using smartphone applications
Using smartphone applications
6 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
7 Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
Operating by hardware buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip the track forward.
Using Aha Radio
When connecting iPod with the Aha Radio in-
stalled, you can control, view, and/or hear Aha
Radio content from this navigation system.
You can also display POI information from the
Aha Radio application on the map screen and
route to these POIs.
p For details concerning operations, refer to
the Help and Tips section within the Aha
Radio application.
p Aha Radio stations may require initial
setup or sign-in before the station can be
accessed.
Note:
! Certain functionality of the Aha Radio service
may not be available when accessing the ser-
vice through the Pioneer navigation system,
including, but not limited to, creating new
Aha stations, deleting Aha stations, recording
shouts by voice, adjusting Aha Radio App
settings, logging into Facebook, creating a Fa-
cebook account, logging into Twitter, or creat-
ing a Twitter account.
! Aha Radio is a service not affiliated with
Pioneer. More information is available at
http://www.ahamobile.com.
! A specific version of the Aha Radio applica-
tion is required to be installed on your smart-
phone in order to enjoy Aha Radio content on
this navigation system.
! Because the application for the smartphone is
not provided by Pioneer, the required version
of the application may not yet be available at
the time of purchase of the navigation system.
Availability, version and update information
can be found at
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com/aharadio
Reading the screen
4
1
2
3
1 Current station information
Shows which source has been selected.
! Station name
Shows the name of the Aha Radio sta-
tion that the navigation system is cur-
rently tuned to.
! Detailed information
Shows the information on the content
currently being played.
p ------- is displayed if there is no
corresponding information.
! Rating information
Shows the rated value of the current
content displayed (only when and where
applicable).
2 Current time
3 Content image
Displays an image of the current content if
one is available.
4 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
En
136
Chapter
25
Using smartphone applications
Using the touch panel keys
12
6
7
3
54
1 Selects an Aha Radio station from the list
Touching this key displays the list of your avail-
able Aha Radio stations. Touch the desired
Aha Radio station to change Aha sources.
= For details of the list operations, refer to
Operating list screens (e.g. iPod list
screen) on page 74.
Scroll the list by dragging items up or down to
display the item you want to select.
2 Playback and pause (or stop)
Touch [d] to start playback. Touching [e] dur-
ing playback, pauses or stops playback.
p Pause (or stop) key functionality de-
pends on the content.
3 Selects content to play
Scrolling the keys up or down displays avail-
able content while tapping a key starts play-
back.
4 Connecting a registered Bluetooth device
manually
p This is displayed when App Connec-
tion is set to Bluetooth.
= For details, refer to Starting procedure on
page 133.
5 Performs additional functions of each sta-
tion or content currently playing
p The icons displayed vary depending on
each station or content.
Indicator Meaning
Touching the key discloses the
current car location through
Aha Radio.
Touching the key retweets the
selected tweets with your Twitter
account.
Touching the key performs fast
reverse of the current content
for 30 seconds.
Touching the key sends you to
the Location confirmation
screen the selected POI to
search for the desired route.
= For the subsequent opera-
tions, refer to Setting a route
to your destination on page
45.
En
137
Chapter
25
Using smartphone applications
Using smartphone applications
Indicator Meaning
Touching the key likes current
content.
p Depending on the content,
touching
or cancels
likes.
Touching the key dislikes cur-
rent content.
p Depending on the content,
touching
or cancels
dislikes.
Touching the key unsubscribes
the selected content. The unsub-
scribed content will be deleted
from the My Feeds station.
Touching the key follows the cur-
rent content. The followed con-
tent will be added to the My
Feeds station.
Touching the key lets you make
a call to a phone number regis-
tered in the current content
using the hands-free function.
6 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
7 Pauses the content currently playing and
shows a text pop-up screen
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
Pop-up screen
p Touching closes the pop-up screen
and plays the content.
Functions coupled with Aha
Radio and the navigation system
Depending on the stations, functions coupled
with the navigation system are available.
Displaying POIs obtained with Aha Radio
If you select a station with content that in-
cludes POI location information, the corre-
sponding POI icons will appear on the map
screen. A maximum of 30 POI icons are dis-
played at one time.
Detailed information can be displayed by pla-
cing the scroll cursor over the POI icon.
= For details, refer to Viewing information
about a specified location on page 32.
p The POI icons on the map will not disap-
pear even when the iPod is removed.
The icons will disappear with the following
operations:
! Turning off the ignition switch (ACC
OFF)
! Initializing user data
! Updating the display of the Aha POI
icons
p Aha POI icons are updated at the following
intervals.
! When a station with content including
location information is reselected
! When the content lists of the Aha appli-
cation are updated
! If there are 30 or more content items se-
lected and 31st POI is read
En
138
Chapter
25
Using smartphone applications
You can control the Bluetooth audio player.
p Before using the Bluetooth audio player,
you need to register and connect the device
to this navigation system.
= For details, refer to Registering your
Bluetooth devices on page 59.
p Operations may vary depending on the
kind of a Bluetooth audio player.
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player
connected to this navigation system, the
available operations with this navigation
system are limited to the following two le-
vels:
! A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribu-
tion Profile): Only playing back songs on
your audio player is possible.
! A2DP profile and AVRCP profile (Audio/
Video Remote Control Profile): Playing
back, pausing, selecting songs, etc., are
possible.
p Since there are a number of Bluetooth
audio players available on the market, op-
erations with your Bluetooth audio player
using this navigation system vary greatly in
range. Please refer to the instruction man-
ual that came with your Bluetooth audio
player as well as this manual while operat-
ing your player on this navigation system.
p While you are listening to songs on your
Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from
operating your cellular phone as much as
possible. If you try operating on your cellu-
lar phone, the signal from your cellular
phone may cause a noise on the song play-
back.
p Even if you switch to another source while
listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio
player, the playback of song continues to
elapse.
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player
you connected to this navigation system,
operations on this navigation system to
control the player may differ from those ex-
plained in this manual.
p When you are talking on a cellular phone
connected to this unit via Bluetooth wire-
less technology, song playback from your
Bluetooth audio player connected to this
unit may be paused.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Tap [Audio] on the left edge of the
screen to display the Audio screen.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the Bluetooth audio player.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on page 141.
Reading the screen
4
56
312
1 Playback condition indicator
Indicates the current playback condition if the
connected Bluetooth audio player features
AVRCP 1.3.
Playing files in random order
Indicator Meaning
Does not play files in random
order.
Plays all audio files in the cur-
rent repeat play range in ran-
dom order.
Setting a repeat play range
Indicator Meaning
Does not repeat.
Repeats just the current file.
Repeats all audio files in the
Bluetooth audio player.
2 Current file information
En
139
Chapter
26
Using the Bluetooth audio player
Using the Bluetooth audio player
If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea-
tures AVRCP 1.3, the following file information
will be displayed.
! : Artist name
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available).
!
: Album title
Shows the title of the album of the cur-
rent file (when available).
!
: Track title
Shows the title of the track currently
playing (when available).
! Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within
the current file.
! File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing
(when available).
p In the following cases, file information
will only be displayed after a file starts
or resumes playing:
! You connect the Bluetooth audio
player compatible with AVRCP1.3,
and operate the player to start play-
ing.
! You select another file when play-
back is paused.
3 Current time
4 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
5 Device name indicator
6 Connection status indicator
Shows whether the device featuring Bluetooth
technology is connected or not.
En
140
Chapter
26
Using the Bluetooth audio player
Using the touch panel keys
12
546
3
1 Plays files in random order
All of the files within the repeat play range
can be played at random by touching only one
key.
p This function is available only when the
connected Bluetooth audio player fea-
tures AVRCP 1.3.
= For details, refer to Plays files in ran-
dom order on the next page.
2 Sets a repeat play range
The repeat play range can be changed by
touching only one key.
p This function is available only when the
connected Bluetooth audio player fea-
tures AVRCP 1.3.
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat
range on the next page.
3 Playback and Pause
Touching [d]or[e] switches between play-
back and pause.
4 Connects the Bluetooth audio player
Touching [Connect] displays the connection
standby screen and the navigation system
waits for the Bluetooth wireless connection re-
quest.
5 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
6 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on the next page.
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can skip files forward or backward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can perform fast reverse or fast for-
ward.
En
141
Chapter
26
Using the Bluetooth audio player
Using the Bluetooth audio player
Using advanced functions
p This menu is available only when the con-
nected Bluetooth audio player features
AVRCP 1.3.
% Touch
on the Audio screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2
1 Changes the repeat range
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
! All: Repeats all audio files in the
Bluetooth audio player.
! Track: Repeats just the current file.
! Off: Does not repeat.
p If you skip the file forward or backward
when the repeat play range in Track,
the repeat play range changes to All.
2 Plays files in random order
Random play lets you playback files in ran-
dom order within the current repeat range.
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or
off.
En
142
Chapter
26
Using the Bluetooth audio player
You can use the navigation system to control
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-
parately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
XM tuners operation manuals. This section
provides information on XM operations with
the navigation system which differs from that
described in the XM tuners operation man-
ual.
The following XM satellite digital tuner units
cannot be connected:
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Tap [XM] on the left edge of the screen
to display the XM screen.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the XM tuner.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on page 145.
Reading the screen
All CH Mode
7
1
6
2
3
4
Category Mode
7
5
1
6
2
3
4
About the logo for channel name
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-
vigation system can be displayed for each
channel. The logo of a newly established chan-
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.
When a logo is not available, the following
substitute icon is displayed.
Substitute icon
p The icon of each broadcast station is con-
tained in the NAND flash memory based
on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio
as of October 2011.
p Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-
tion in the future may not be supported by
the navigation system, and may cause the
unit to display incorrect icons.
1 XM band indicator
Shows the XM band that has been selected.
2 Current XM station information
Shows the detailed information of the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
! XM channel number
Shows the XM channel number the
tuner is currently tuned to.
!
: XM station name
Shows the XM broadcast station name
the tuner is currently tuned in.
!
: Artist (performer) name
Shows the artist (performer) name cur-
rently playing (when available).
!
: Song title (program name)
En
143
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
Using the XM tuner
Shows the title of the current song (pro-
gram).
p ------- is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
3 Current time
4 XM station information
! XM station name logo
! XM channel number
! Preset number
Shows what preset item has been se-
lected.
5 XM channel category
Shows the category of broadcast channel.
6 XM channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in All CH Mode, and select a
channel from selected category in
Category Mode.
7 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
En
144
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
Using the touch panel keys
All CH Mode
c
a
b
9
8
67
4
5
3211
Category Mode
c
a
b
9
8
67
4
e5
32dd
1 Performs manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a time.
p If you keep touching [o]or[p] you
can skip the broadcasting channels.
2 Switches between the AV operation
screen and the preset list display
You can switch the screen display according
to your preference.
En
145
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
Using the XM tuner
= For details of the operation, refer to
Switching between the AV operation
screen and the list screen on page 74.
3 Memorizes the current song
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song
on the next page.
4 Recalls channels from the preset
Once you have stored broadcast channels,
you can easily recall preset channels from
memory with a tap of a key.
= For details, refer to Storing and recalling
broadcast stations on the next page.
5 Selects an XM channel directly
= For details, refer to Selecting an XM
channel directly on this page.
6 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
7 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on page 148.
8 Switches the XM channel select mode
You can switch the mode between the two
methods for selecting and listing the channel.
All CH Mode :
You can select a channel from all channels
when you operate this function.
Category Mode:
You can select a channel within a selected ca-
tegory that you operate this function.
9 Switches to the list display of song titles
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel
from the list on the next page.
a Switches to the list display of artist
names
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel
from the list on the next page.
b Switches to the list display of XM station
names
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel
from the list on the next page.
c Selects an XM band
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between
the following XM bands: XM 1, XM 2,or
XM 3.
p This function is convenient for preparing
different preset lists for each band.
d Performs manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a time
within a selected category.
p If you keep touching [o]or[p] you
can skip the broadcasting channels.
e Switches the channel category
Touch [c]or[d] to select the desired cate-
gory.
Selecting an XM channel directly
You can select an XM channel directly by en-
tering the desired channel number.
1 Touch [Direct].
2 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
channel number.
To cancel the input numbers one by one,
touch
. Touching and holding allows you
to delete all input numbers.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The XM channel that was entered is selected.
4 Touch
.
You return to the previous display.
Displaying the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played.
1 Touch [Direct].
2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
p If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
3 Touch .
You return to the previous display.
4 Wait until the Radio ID is displayed.
En
146
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys
(P1 to P6), you can easily store up to six
broadcast channels for later recall (also with
the tap of a key).
1 Select the channel that you want to
store in memory.
2 Display the preset channel list.
= For details, refer to Switches between the
AV operation screen and the preset list
display on page 145.
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6].
The selected station has been stored in mem-
or y.
The next time you tap the same preset tuning
key P1 to P6, the station is recalled from
memory.
p Up to 18 stations, six for each of three XM
bands can be stored in memory.
Selecting a channel from the list
The list content can be switched so you can
search for the song you want to listen to not
only by the channel name but also by the artist
name or song title.
p The channel list shows all channels during
All CH Mode, and the channels included
in the selected category during
Category Mode.
1 Display a list screen.
= For details, refer to Switches to the list
display of song titles on the previous
page.
= For details, refer to Switches to the list
display of artist names on the previous
page.
= For details, refer to Switches to the list
display of XM station names on the pre-
vious page.
2 Touch [List].
XM channel list appears in the display.
Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-
lows:
CH Name List (Channel name)
Song Title List (Song title)
Artist Name List (Artist name)
3 Tap the desired channel that you want
to listen to.
= For details, refer to Operating list screens
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 74.
p During Category Mode, touch [c]or[d]
to switch to another category.
Using MyMix function
MyMix function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-
orized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the
song title and the artist name are memor-
ized.
Memorizing the song
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized to MyMix .
% Touch and hold [Memo].
The song title and artist name of current song
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-
firmation message appears.
p The song title and artist name of up to 12
songs can be memorized. Trying to save
more than 12 songs will result in older ones
being overwritten.
p You cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name when ––––––––is dis-
played on the title information.
p This function is invalid for the channel
000.
En
147
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
Using the XM tuner
p The memorized title may not be displayed
correctly depending on the conditions.
p You can customize the setting for the mem-
orized songs later.
= For details concerning operations, refer
to Setting the memorized songs on this
page.
When the memorized song is broadcast
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen
to that track.
p If the memorized song is not checked, or
when [Off] is selected on [Alert] on the
Memo Edit screen, no alert will be pro-
vided.
= Refer to Setting the memorized songs on
this page.
p Notification may not be provided depend-
ing on the status of the navigation system.
p If there is even a slight difference between
the memorized title and the title of the
song being broadcast, no notification will
be provided even though they are the same
song.
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can move the channel up or down.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can move channels up or down by holding
down the button.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the XM screen.
The Function menu appears.
1
1 Sets the memorized songs
Setting the memorized songs
Selecting the songs to alert
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can
change the notification setting when the song
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable
notification for each song.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
2 Touch the song title that you want to
disable notification for.
The check mark is removed, and the notifica-
tion setting of the song is deactivated.
Changing the alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing each memorized song.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
2 Touch [Alert].
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.
Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized
songs from the song title list.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
2 Touch and hold the song you want to
delete.
p To delete all songs that are memorized,
touch [Delete All].
3 Touch [Yes].
En
148
Chapter
27
Using the XM tuner
You can use the navigation system to control a
Pioneer Sirius Satellite Radio tuner, which is
sold separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
SIRIUS tuners operation manuals. This sec-
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-
tions with navigation system which differs
from that described in the SIRIUS tuners op-
eration manual.
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal
tuner (sold separately) with this navigation
system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is
required. For details concerning operation,
refer to the owners manual of Pioneer SIR-
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect
universal tuner.
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Tap [SIRIUS] on the left edge of the
screen to display the SIRIUS screen.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the SIRIUS tuner.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on the next page.
Reading the screen
All CH Mode
8
7
1
6
2
3
4
Category Mode
8
7
1
6 5
2
3
4
1 SIRIUS band indicator
Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-
lected.
2 SIRIUS channel number indicator
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the
tuner is tuned to.
3 Current time
4 Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
5 SIRIUS channel category
Shows the category of broadcast channel.
6 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in All CH Mode, and select a
channel from the selected category in
Category Mode.
= For details concerning operations, refer
to Switches the SIRIUS channel se-
lect mode on page 151.
7 Variable information area
Shows various information about the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
= For more details about the displayed in-
formation, refer to Switches the SIR-
IUS display on page 151.
8 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
En
149
Chapter
28
Using the SIRIUS tuner
Using the SIRIUS tuner
Using the touch panel keys
All CH Mode
b
a
9
78
5
6
42 31
Category Mode
b
a
9
78
5
c6
42 31
1 Switches the SIRIUS Instant replay mode
= For details, refer to Using the Instant
Replay function on page 152.
2 Performs manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a time.
p If you keep touching [o]or[p] you
can skip the broadcasting channels.
3 Selects a SIRIUS channel directly
= For details, refer to Selecting a SIRIUS
channel directly on the next page.
En
150
Chapter
28
Using the SIRIUS tuner
4 Memorizes the current song
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song
on the next page.
5 Recalls channels from the preset
Tap to recall the preset channel.
= For details, refer to Storing and recalling
broadcast stations on this page.
6 Switches the SIRIUS display
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display in-
formation.
Channel number Channel name Chan-
nel category Artist name/feature Song/
program title Composer
7 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
8 Displays the Function menu
= For details, refer to Using advanced func-
tions on page 153.
9 Switches the SIRIUS channel select
mode
You can switch the mode between the two
methods for selecting and listing the channel.
All CH Mode:
You can select a channel from all channels
when you operate this function.
Category Mode:
You can select a channel within a selected ca-
tegory that you operate this function.
a Switches between the AV operation
screen and the preset list display
You can switch the screen display according
to your preference.
= For details of the operation, refer to
Switching between the AV operation
screen and the list screen on page 74.
b Selects a SIRIUS band
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between
the following SIRIUS bands: SIRIUS1,
SIRIUS2,orSIRIUS3.
p This function is convenient for preparing
different preset lists for each band.
c Switches the channel category
Touch [c]or[d] to select the desired cate-
gory.
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by
entering the desired channel number.
1 Touch [Direct].
2 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
channel number.
To cancel the input numbers one by one,
touch
. Touching and holding allows you
to delete all input numbers.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-
lected.
4 Touch
.
You return to the previous display.
Display the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played.
1 Touch [Direct].
2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
3 Touch
.
You return to the previous display.
4 Wait until the Radio ID is displayed.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys
(Preset 1 to Preset 6), you can easily store
up to six broadcast stations for later recall
(also with the tap of a key).
1 Select the channel that you want to
store in memory.
2 Display the preset channel list.
= For details, refer to Switches between the
AV operation screen and the preset list
display on this page.
En
151
Chapter
28
Using the SIRIUS tuner
Using the SIRIUS tuner
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key
[Preset 1] to [Preset 6].
The selected station has been stored in mem-
or y.
The next time you tap the same preset tuning
key Preset 1 to Preset 6 the station is re-
called from memory.
p Up to 18 stations, six for each of three SIR-
IUS bands can be stored in memory.
Using the song alert function
The song alert function memorizes the song
title and artist name of the song currently
being received. When a track that matches the
memorized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
p The track itself is NOT downloaded; only
the song title and the artist name are mem-
orized.
Memorizing the song
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized.
% Touch and hold [Memo].
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized.
p Up to 10 song titles and artist names can be
memorized.
p You cannot memorize a song that does not
have song title and artist name information.
p You cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name of channel 000.
p The memorized title may not be displayed
correctly.
When the memorized song is broadcast
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch [Jump] to switch to that station, and
you can listen to that track. If you touch
[Stay], the channel does not switch.
p If the alert for the song is Off or set
Alert to Off, no notification will be pro-
vided even when that song is broadcast.
= For details, refer to Setting the memor-
ized songs on the next page.
p Notification may not be provided depend-
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-
tem.
= For details, refer to Selecting the songs
to alert on the next page.
Using the Instant Replay function
The Instant Replay function allows you to
replay the stored broadcast on Pioneer SIRIUS
BUS INTERFACE (if Pioneer SIRIUS BUS IN-
TERFACE capable for this function). As soon
as you tune to a channel, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS
INTERFACE automatically begins storing the
broadcast. It can store approximately up to 44
minutes previous (depending on the selected
channel and the memory capacity of Pioneer
SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE).
1 Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS
screen to activate the Instant Replay
mode.
2 Touch keys for Instant Replay.
Touch panel
keys
Action
[o]
Return to the start of the current
song or program. Touching again
will skip back to the previous song
or program.
[o] and hold Fast reverses.
[p]
Forwards play to the next song or
program.
[p] and hold Fast-forwards.
[f]
Touching [f] switches between
playback and pause.
p During Instant Replay mode, each touch
of [Disp] changes the display information
as follows;
Time position Channel number Chan-
nel name Channel category Artist
name/feature Song/program title
Composer
p You cannot replay the broadcast prior to the
beginning of stored data.
En
152
Chapter
28
Using the SIRIUS tuner
Operating by hardware
buttons
Pressing the TRK button
You can move the channel up or down.
During Instant Replay mode, you can skip
the song or program forward or backward.
Pressing and holding the TRK button
You can move channels up or down by holding
down the button.
During Instant Replay mode, you can per-
form fast reverse or fast forward.
Using advanced functions
% Touch on the SIRIUS screen.
The Function menu appears.
1 2 3
1 Sets the memorized songs
2 Uses the Game Alert function
3 Displays Game Information
= For details of each function, refer to sec-
tions below with the relative titles.
Setting the memorized songs
Selecting the songs to alert
You can change the setting of the alert when
the track is broadcast again. You can enable
or disable alert for each song.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
2 Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the
desired song.
3 Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on.
When the alert for the song is activated, [On]
appears at the beginning of the selected title.
p Touch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off.
Changing the alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing each memorized song.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
2 Touch [Alert].
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.
Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized
tracks from the song title list.
1 Touch [Memo Edit].
2 Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the
song title that you want to delete.
3 Touch [Delete] when the song you
want to delete is displayed.
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
4 Touch [Yes].
Using the Game Alert function
Selecting teams for Game Alert
This navigation system can alert you when
games involving your favorite sports teams are
about to start. To use this function you need to
store the teams you want to follow in advance.
En
153
Chapter
28
Using the SIRIUS tuner
Using the SIRIUS tuner
1 Touch [Game Alert].
2 Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the
league.
3 Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the
team.
4 Touch [On/Off].
The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.
p When the selected team is excluded from
the alert target, the team is displayed as
[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.
If you have already selected 12 teams,
FULL is displayed and adding new entries
is not possible. In this case, delete a team
and then try again.
Changing the alert setting
You can enable or disable the alert for selected
items. This function is useful when you want
to turn the alert off temporarily without chan-
ging the setting of each selected team.
1 Touch [Game Alert].
2 Touch [Alert].
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.
When a game involving one of your
favorite teams is broadcast
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump]to
switch the station to view the game informa-
tion. If you touch [Stay], the station does not
switch.
p Alerts may not be available depending on
the status of the navigation system.
Displaying Game Information
An alert will be displayed when a game with
the team you selected is about to start (or is
currently under way). You can also display
game information and changes to the broad-
cast channel.
p The Game Information function is available
when Alert is On in Game Alert.
1 Touch [Game Info].
2 Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game
score information that is registered.
p The game score will be updated automati-
cally.
p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel
that broadcasts the displayed game.
p If you have not selected any team,
Not Set is displayed.
p When no games involving your favorite
teams are currently being played
NO GAME is displayed.
En
154
Chapter
28
Using the SIRIUS tuner
You can display the video image output by the
equipment connected to the navigation sys-
tem. For details of the connection method,
refer to Installation Manual.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, video images cannot be
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view
video images, you must stop in a safe place and
apply the parking brake.
Reading the screen
2
1
1 Current time
2 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
Using AV1
You can display the video image output by the
equipment connected to video input 1.
1 Touch [AV1 Input] on the AV System
Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1
(AV1) on page 178.
2 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
3 Tap [AV1] on the left edge of the
screen.
The image is displayed on the screen.
4 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
Using AV2
You can display the video image output by the
equipment connected to video input 2.
1 Touch [AV2 Input] on the AV System
Settings menu.
= For details, refer to Setting video input 2
(AV2) on page 179.
2 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
3 Tap [AV2] on the left edge of the
screen.
The image is displayed on the screen.
4 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
Using the touch panel keys
12
1 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
2 Hides the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
p If you want to display the touch panel
keys again, touch anywhere on the LCD
screen.
En
155
Chapter
29
Using AV input
Using AV input
The term external unit refers to future
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned
for, or to devices that allow control of basic
functions although they are not fully con-
trolled by the navigation system. Two external
units can be controlled by this navigation sys-
tem. When two external units are connected,
the navigation system allocates them as exter-
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.
For details of the connection method, refer to
Installation Manual.
For details of the operation, refer to the exter-
nal units operation manual. This section pro-
vides information on external unit operations
with the navigation system that differ from
those described in the external units opera-
tion manual.
p Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-
nal unit may not respond.)
Starting procedure
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2 Tap [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the left edge of
the screen to select the external unit.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the external unit.
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on the next page.
Reading the screen
1
2 3
4
1 Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2 External unit indicator
Displays the information that is sent by con-
nected external units.
3 Current time
4 Auto/Manual mode indicator
Shows the current mode.
En
156
Chapter
30
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)
Using the touch panel keys
13
4
5
6
2
1 Recalls equalizer curves
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer
on page 183.
2 Sends a band command
Touch to send a band command to the exter-
nal unit.
p Operation varies depending on the ex-
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,
the external unit may not respond.)
3 Uses [F1] through [F4] to operate the ex-
ternal unit
The external unit can be operated by transmit-
ting the operating commands set to F1
through F4.
p The operating commands set to F1
through F4 vary depending on the ex-
ternal unit.
p Some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.
4 Switches between automatic and manual
function
You can turn automatic and manual function
on or off.
You can switch between Auto and
Manual functions of the external unit con-
nected.
Initially, this function is set to Auto.
p Operating commands set for Auto
and Manual operations vary depend-
ing on the external unit connected.
5 Sends a command [a], [b], [c], or [d]
Touch to operate the external unit.
p Operation varies depending on the ex-
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,
some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.)
6 Sends a [1] key to [6] key command
The external unit can be operated by transmit-
ting the operating commands set to 1 key
through 6 key.
p Operation varies depending on the ex-
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,
some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.)
En
157
Chapter
30
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)
Displaying the screen for
navigation settings
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Settings].
The Settings Menu screen appears.
p This can also be operated using the Short-
cut Menu screen.
3 Touch [Navi Settings].
The Navi Settings menu appears.
4 Touch the item that you want to
change the setting.
# If you touch , the previous screen re-
turns.
Checking the connections
of leads
Check that leads are properly connected be-
tween the navigation system and the vehicle.
Please also check whether they are connected
in the correct positions.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on this page.
2 Touch [Connection Status].
The Connection Status screen appears.
2
3
4
5
1
1 Speed Pulse
The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-
gation system is shown. 0 is shown while
the vehicle is stationary.
2 GPS Antenna
Indicates the connection status of the GPS
antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from
how many satellites the signal is received.
Color
Signal com-
munication
Used in posi-
tioning
Orange Yes Yes
Yellow Yes No
p When the GPS antenna is connected to
this navigation system, OK is dis-
played.
When the GPS antenna is not con-
nected to this navigation system, NOK
is displayed.
p If reception is poor, please change the
installation position of the GPS antenna.
3 Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied, On is
displayed. When the parking brake is re-
leased, Off is displayed.
4 Illumination
When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-
hicle are on, On is displayed. When the
small lamps of a vehicle are off, Off is dis-
played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-
nected, Off appears.)
5 Back Signal
En
158
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
When the shift lever is shifted to R, the
signal switches to High or Low. (One of
these is displayed depending on the
vehicle.)
Checking sensor learning
status and driving status
p The navigation system can automatically
use its sensor memory based on the outer
dimensions of the tires.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [3D Calibration Status].
The 3D Calibration Status screen appears.
2
3
4
5
1
6
7
1 Speed
Indicates the speed detected by the naviga-
tion system. (This indication may be differ-
ent from the actual speed of your vehicle,
so please do not use this instead of the
speedometer.)
2 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational
speed
Indicates acceleration or deceleration velo-
city of your vehicle. Also, rotational speed
when your vehicle turns to left or right is
shown.
3 Distance
Indicates driving distance.
4 Speed Pulse
Indicates the total number of speed pulses.
5 Learning Status
Indicates the current driving mode.
6 Inclination
Indicates the degree of slope of the street
that you are currently on.
7 Degree of learning
Sensor learning situations for distance
(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-
cated by the length of bars.
p When tires have been changed or
chains fitted, turning on the Speed
Pulse allows the system to detect the
fact that the tire diameter has changed,
and automatically replaces the value for
calculating distance.
p If a separately sold speed pulse genera-
tor (ND-PG1) is connected, the distance
calculation value cannot be replaced
automatically.
Clearing status
You can delete the learned results stored in
Distance, Speed Pulse or Learning Sta-
tus.
1 Touch [Distance] or [Speed Pulse].
The following message appears.
2 Touch [Yes].
Clears the results stored in Distance or
Speed Pulse.
3 Touch [Learning Status].
The following message appears.
En
159
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
4 Touch [All].
Clears all leaning results.
p Touch [All] for the following cases:
! After changing the installation position
of the navigation system
! After changing the installation angle of
the navigation system
! After moving the navigation system to
another vehicle
# If you touch [Distance], all learned results
stored in Distance are cleared.
Using the fuel consumption
function
Inputting the fuel consumption
information for calculating the
fuel cost
You can estimate the fuel cost to your destina-
tion by entering the fuel consumption informa-
tion in the navigation system.
= For details, refer to Setting a route to your
destination on page 45.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
2 Touch [Gas Mileage].
The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears.
3 Enter the fuel consumption informa-
tion.
Enter the following items:
! Surface Road Gas Mileage:
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on ordin-
ary roads.
! Freeway Gas Mileage:
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the
freeway.
! Gas Price Per Unit:
Enter the fuel unit price.
! Gas Unit:
Set the fuel unit.
! Currency:
Set the unit of currency.
p The unit in Surface Road Gas Mileage
and Freeway Gas Mileage depend on
the one chosen in Gas Unit.
! When Gas Unit is set to Gallon.
Enter how many miles (kilometers) you
get to a gallon.
! When Gas Unit is set to Liter.
Enter how much fuel you need to travel
60 miles (100 kilometers).
When all the items are entered, inputting the
fuel consumption information is complete.
Calculating the fuel consumption
When you enter the fueling information to the
navigation system, and export the data to SD
memory cards, you can check the fuel con-
sumption information by using the utility pro-
gram AVIC FEEDS, which is available
separately, on your PC.
p Up to 24 sets of data can be stored. You
can also export the data, as described
below.
En
160
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
If the entries reach the maximum number,
a new entry will overwrite the oldest one.
These calculations are based only on the infor-
mation that you provide and not on any data
from the vehicle. The fuel mileage displayed is
only a reference value, and does not guarantee
the fuel mileage displayed can be obtained.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
2 Touch [Gas Mileage].
The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears.
3 Touch [Gas Price Calculation].
The Gas Price Calculation screen appears.
4 Enter the fuel consumption informa-
tion.
Enter the following items:
! Distance:
Enter the distance traveled since the pre-
vious fueling.
p The distance is entered automatically
only when the distance traveled since
the previous fueling is recorded.
! Gas Pumped:
Enter the amount of fuel pumped.
! Gas Price Per Unit:
Enter the fuel unit price.
When all the items are entered, the fuel con-
sumption is displayed next to Gas Mileage.
5 Touch [OK].
The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears.
Exporting the data of fuel cost
information
Exporting the fuel cost data to an SD memory
card is possible.
p The data stored in this navigation system
will be cleared as exporting it to the SD
memory card.
p If there is previous data in the SD memory
card, the data is overwritten with new data.
1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
2 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
3 Touch [Gas Mileage].
The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears.
En
161
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
4 Touch [Export].
After a message confirming whether to export
the data appeared, exporting the data to the
SD memory card starts.
The Gas Mileage Setting screen appears
when it is done.
Recording your travel history
Activating the track logger enables you to re-
cord your driving history (called track log
below). You can review the travel history later.
p If an SD memory card is inserted into the
SD card slot, the track logs will be stored in
the SD memory card.
1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
2 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
3 Touch [Drive Log Settings].
The Drive Log Settings screen appears.
4 Touch [Drive Log Settings].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! Off (default):
You cannot export your track log to the SD
memory card.
! On:
You can store your track log to the SD mem-
ory card.
p While the setting is On, the navigation
system continues to store the track logs in
the inserted SD memory card.
5 Touch [Type].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! Private (default):
Changes the track log attribute to Private.
! Business:
Changes the track log attribute to Busi-
ness.
! Other:
Changes the track log attribute to
Other.
Using the demonstration
guidance
This is a demonstration function for retail
stores. After a route is set, touching this key
starts the simulation of route guidance.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
2 Touch [Demo Mode].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! Off (default):
The demonstration guidance is set off.
! On:
Repeats the demonstration guidance.
3 Display the map screen.
The demonstration guidance will begin.
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen
switching overview on page 26.
En
162
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Registering your home
Registering your home position saves time
and effort. Also, routes to home positions can
be calculated easily with a single touch of the
key from the Destination Menu. The regis-
tered home position can also be modified
later.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
2 Touch [Set Home].
The Set Home screen appears.
3 Touch [Home].
The Select Search method screen appears.
# If you touch [Phone#], you can edit your
home phone number.
p [Phone#] is only available when you have
already registered your home phone num-
ber.
4 Search for a location.
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.
After searching for a point, the map of the se-
lected position is displayed.
5 Touch [OK].
The location is registered, and then the Set
Home screen appears.
6 Touch [OK].
The registration is complete.
Correcting the current location
Touch the screen to adjust the current position
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the
map.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
2 Touch [Modify Current Location].
3 Scroll to the position where you want
to set, then touch [OK].
4 Touch the arrow key on the screen to
set the direction, then touch [OK].
Changing the eco-function
setting
You can change the eco-function setting.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
2 Touch [Eco Settings].
The Eco Settings screen appears.
3 Touch each item.
On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
! Eco Score
! On (default):
Displays Eco Score.
! Off:
Hides Eco Score.
En
163
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
= For details, refer to Checking the eco-friendly
driving status on page 35.
! Eco Drive Level
! On (default):
After you arrive the destination, a mes-
sage appears and a beep sounds if the
level of Eco Drive Level have in-
creased or decreased.
! Off:
No message appears and no sound
beeps when the vehicle reaches the des-
tination.
= For details, refer to Displaying Eco Drive
Level guidance on page 36.
! Rapid Start Warning
! Off (default):
No message appears and no sound
beeps when the vehicle experiences a
sudden start.
! On:
A message appears and a sound beeps
when the vehicle experiences a sudden
start.
= For details, refer to Sudden start alert on
page 36.
4 Touch [OK].
The settings are complete.
Clearing the fuel consumption
information
You can clear the fuel consumption informa-
tion accumulated to date.
1 Display the Navi Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
navigation settings on page 158.
2 Touch [Eco Settings].
The Eco Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Clear Eco Record].
The message confirming whether to clear the
fuel consumption information appears.
4 Touch [Yes].
Fuel consumption data are cleared.
Displaying the screen for
map settings
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Settings].
The Settings Menu screen appears.
3 Touch [Map Settings].
The Map Settings screen appears.
4 Touch the item that you want to
change the setting.
# If you touch , the previous screen re-
turns.
En
164
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Setting the auto-zoom display
This setting enables switching to an enlarged
map around the point where your vehicle is
approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of
freeway or a junction.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [Close Up View].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! On (default):
Switches to an enlarged map.
! Off:
Does not switch to an enlarged map.
Setting the detailed city map
p The detailed city map and this setting are
available for AVIC-Z140BH only.
You can select whether to display the city map
when in certain metropolitan city areas.
p The city map is displayed when the map
scale is 0.05 mile (50 meters) or less.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [City Map].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! On (default):
Automatically switches to the city map
when in a city map area.
! Off:
Does not show the city map.
p Even if you switch City Map to On,
city map cannot be displayed in areas
where there is no city map data.
Setting the barrier graphic
for city map
p The detailed city map and this setting are
available for AVIC-Z140BH only.
On the city map screen, you can display a
barrier graphic pattern where no city map
data is available. This prevents a normal map
of a different scale from being displayed at the
same time, greatly enhancing the clarity of the
city map on screen.
barrier graphic
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [City Map Barrier].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! On (default):
Displays the barrier graphic for city map.
When the vehicle position or cursor enters
the barrier graphic area, the graphic disap-
pears and a normal map is displayed full
screen.
! Off:
En
165
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
Does not display the barrier graphic for city
map. When the vehicle position or cursor
enters the area where no city map data is
available, a normal map is displayed full
screen.
Displaying the traffic
notification icon
Selects whether to display or hide the traffic
notification icons on the map when incidents
occur on your route.
= For details, refer to Checking traffic informa-
tion manually on page 57.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [Show Traffic Incident].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! View (default):
Displays the icons on the map.
! Hide:
Hides the icons on the map.
Displaying the Bluetooth
connection icon
Selects whether to display or hide the icon for
current status of the phone connection via
Bluetooth wireless technology.
Bluetooth connection icon
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [Bluetooth Connected].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! View (default):
Displays the Bluetooth connection icon on
the map.
! Hide:
Hides the Bluetooth connection icon on the
map.
Setting the current street
name display
Selects whether to display or hide the street
name (or city name) that your vehicle is travel-
ing along.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
En
166
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
3 Touch [Current Street Name].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! View (default):
Displays the street name (or city name) on
the map.
! Hide:
Hides the street name (or city name) on the
map.
Setting the display of icons
of favorite locations
You can select whether to display the Favor-
ites icon on the map.
p Favorites icons are displayed when the
map scale is 10 miles (20 kilometers) or
less.
= For details, refer to Editing the favorite loca-
tion in the list on page 50.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [Favorites Icon].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! On (default):
Displays the Favorites icon on the map.
! Off:
Hides the Favorites icon on the map.
Displaying the 3D landmarks
p The 3D landmarks and this setting are
available for AVIC-Z140BH only.
You can select whether to display the 3D land-
mark on the map.
p 3D landmark only appears when the view
mode is 3D View and the map scale is
set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [3D Land Mark].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! On (default):
Displays the 3D landmark on the map.
! Off:
Hides the 3D landmark on the map.
Displaying maneuvers
Selects whether to display or hide maneuvers
on the map.
Maneuvers
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [Show Maneuver].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! View (default):
Displays maneuvers on the map.
! Hide:
Hides maneuvers on the map.
En
167
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
Displaying the fuel
consumption information
Selects whether to display Eco-Meter, indicat-
ing the fuel consumption information, on the
map.
p Eco-Meter appears when 2D View or
3D View is selected.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The Displayed Information screen appears.
3 Touch [Show Eco Meter].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! View (default):
Displays Eco-Meter on the map.
! Hide:
Hides Eco-Meter on the map.
Displaying POI on the map
Displays icons for the surrounding facilities
(POI) on the map.
p POI icons are not displayed when the map
scale is 0.75 mile (1 kilometer) or more.
p Up to 200 items, 100 preinstalled POIs or
100 custom POIs, are displayed on the
map.
Displaying preinstalled POIs on
the map
p You can select up to 10 items from the sub-
categories or detailed categories.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Overlay POI].
The Overlay POI screen appears.
3 Touch [Display] to change the setting to
On.
p If you do not want to display the POI icon
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it
Off. (Even if Display is turned Off,
the POI selection setting is retained.)
4 Touch [POI].
The Overlay POI (Main Category) screen
appears.
5 Touch the main category you want.
A list of subcategories under the selected
main category appears.
p Categories that are already selected will
have a blue check mark.
6 Touch the subcategory to display.
A red check mark appears next to the selected
category. To cancel the selection, touch the
entr y again.
En
168
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
If there are detailed categories within the sub-
category, [Detail] is active. If you select the
subcategory such, all detailed categories with-
in the subcategory is selected and [Detail] be-
comes inactive.
# If you touch [Detail], the detailed categories
under the subcategory are displayed. Select a de-
tailed category of your preference and touch
[OK].
p When only a few detailed categories are se-
lected, a blue check mark will appear next
to the selected subcategory.
7 Touch [OK].
The Overlay POI (Main Category) screen
returns.
If you want to select or deselect other items,
repeat these steps as many as necessary.
8 To finish the selection, touch [OK] in
the Overlay POI (Main Category) screen.
Displaying the customized POIs
Creating a customized POI is possible by
using the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is
available separately, on your PC. (AVIC FEEDS
will be available on our website.) Storing the
customized POI properly and inserting the SD
memory card enables the system to display
the icons on the map screen.
p You can select up to 10 items from the sub-
categories or detailed categories.
1 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
2 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
3 Touch [Overlay POI].
The Overlay POI screen appears.
4 Touch [Display] to change the setting to
On.
p If you do not want to display the POI icon
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it
Off. (Even if Display is turned Off,
the POI selection setting is retained.)
5 Touch [Custom POI].
The list of POI categories appears.
6 Touch the items you want to display.
7 To finish the selection, touch [OK].
Changing the view mode
Various types of screen displays can be se-
lected for navigation guidance.
= For details of the operation, refer to Switch-
ing the view mode on page 34.
Setting the map color change
between day and night
To improve the visibility of the map during the
evening, you can set the timing for changing
the combination of the map color.
En
169
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Day/Night Display].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! Automatic (default):
You can change the colors of a map be-
tween daytime and nighttime according to
whether the vehicle lights are on or off.
! Day:
The map is always displayed with daytime
colors.
p To use this function with Automatic, the
orange/white lead of the navigation system
must be connected correctly.
Changing the road color
You can set the road color to bluish or reddish.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Road Color].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! Blue (default):
Changes to blue based road colors.
! Red:
Changes to red based road colors.
Changing the setting of
navigation interruption screen
You can set whether to automatically switch to
the navigation screen from the AV screen
when your vehicle approaches a guidance
point such as an intersection.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [AV Guide Mode].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! On (default):
Switches from the AV operation screen to
the map screen.
! Off:
Does not switch the screen.
p This setting is effective only when Close
Up View is set to On.
Selecting the Quick Access
menu
Select items to display on the map screen. In
the list displayed on screen, the items with red
checks are displayed on the map screen.
Touch the item you want to display and then
touch [OK] when a red check appears. You
can select up to five items.
1 Display the Map Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
map settings on page 164.
2 Touch [Quick Access Selection].
The Quick Access Selection screen appears.
3 Touch the item that you want to set in
Quick Access .
You can select the following items:
p Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show
that these are default or factory settings.
!
: Registration*
Register information on the location indi-
cated by the cursor to Favorites.
= For details, refer to Registering a location
by scroll mode on page 50.
!
: Vicinity Search*
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity
of the cursor.
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby
POI on page 41.
!
: Overlay POI*
Displays icons for surrounding facilities
(POI) on the map.
En
170
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the
map on page 168.
!
: Volume*
Displays the Volume Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume
for Guidance and Phone on page 173.
!
: Contacts*
Displays the Contacts List screen.
= For details, refer to Calling a number in
the phone book on page 65.
!
: Whole Route Overview
Displays the entire route (currently set) with
the Route Overview screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the route
overview on page 46.
!
: Traffic on Route
Displays a list of traffic information on the
route.
= For details, refer to Checking traffic infor-
mation on the route on page 55.
!
: Traffic Events
Displays a list of traffic events information.
= For details, refer to Checking all traffic in-
formation on page 54.
!
: Day/Night Display
Switches Day/Night Display setting.
= For details, refer to Setting the map color
change between day and night on page
169.
!
: Favorites Icon
Switches Favorites Icon setting.
= For details, refer to Setting the display of
icons of favorite locations on page 167.
!
: Position Fix
When the vehicle position enters a different
street parallel to the street you are traveling,
the vehicle position returns to the street you
are traveling.
4 To finish the setting, touch [OK].
Displaying the screen for
system settings
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Settings].
The Settings Menu screen appears.
p This can also be operated using the Short-
cut Menu screen.
3 Touch [System Settings].
The System Settings screen appears.
4 Touch the item that you want to
change the setting.
# If you touch , the previous screen returns.
Customizing the regional settings
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on this page.
2 Touch [Regional Settings].
The Regional Settings screen appears.
En
171
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
Selecting the language
You can set the languages used on the pro-
gram and voice guidance. Each language can
be set separately.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [Regional Settings].
The Regional Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Program Language].
The Select Program Language screen ap-
pears.
4 Touch the desired language.
After the language is selected, the previous
screen returns.
5 Touch [Voice Language].
The Voice Language Selection screen ap-
pears.
6 Touch the desired language.
After the language is selected, the previous
screen returns.
7 Touch [OK] on the Regional Settings
screen.
A message confirming whether to restart the
navigation system appears.
8 Touch [OK].
The navigation system restarts.
Setting the time difference
Adjusts the systems clock. Set the time differ-
ence (+, ) from the time originally set in your
navigation system.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [Regional Settings].
The Regional Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Time].
The Time Settings screen appears.
4 To set the time difference, touch [+] or
[].
The time difference between the time origin-
ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-
dard Time) and the current location of your
vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time
difference. Touching [+]or[] changes the
time difference display in half-hour incre-
ments.
The time difference can be set from 4 to
+9 hours.
5 Touch [Summer Time].
Summer time setting is off by default. Touch
[Summer Time ] to change the setting if you
are in the summer time period.
6 Touch [Time format].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! 12H (default):
Changes the display to 12-hour format with
am/pm.
! 24H:
Changes the display to 24-hour format.
Changing the unit between km and miles
This setting controls the unit of distance and
speed displayed on your navigation system.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [Regional Settings].
The Regional Settings screen appears.
En
172
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
3 Touch [km / mile].
A message confirming whether to change the
setting appears.
4 Touch [Yes].
Each time you touch the key changes the set-
ting.
! mile (default):
Shows distance in miles.
! Mile&Yard:
Shows distance in miles and yards.
! km:
Shows distance in kilometers.
# If you touch [No], the setting is canceled.
Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle
When calculating the expected time of arrival
and the travel time to the destination, set the
average speed for the freeway or ordinary
roads using [+] and [].
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Regional Settings].
The Regional Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Average Speed].
The Average Speed Settings screen ap-
pears.
4 Touch [+] or [] to set the speed.
p The estimated time of arrival may not be
taken into account other parameters than
this speed value.
5 Touch [OK].
The settings are complete.
Setting the Volume for
Guidance and Phone
The sound volume for the navigation can be
set. You can separately set the volume of the
route guidance and the beep sound.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Volume].
The Volume Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [+] or [] to set their volume.
On this screen, you can operate the following
items.
! Guidance
This setting controls the guidance volume
of navigation.
p When set to
, guidance is output.
When set to
, no guidance is output.
! Phone Ringtone
This setting controls the incoming ring tone
volume.
! Phone Voice
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-
lume.
p Phone Ringtone and Phone Voice ad-
justments are needed only when the cellu-
lar phone featuring Bluetooth technology is
connected.
p Volume of the AV source is adjusted by the
VOL (+/) button or Multi-control.
= For details, refer to Checking part names
and functions on page 14.
# If you touch the key next to Beep, the setting
is changed.
! On (default):
En
173
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
A beep sounds.
! Off:
The beep sound is muted.
# If you touch the key next to VR Beep, the set-
ting is changed.
! On (default):
Voice recognition beep is enabled.
! Off:
Voice recognition beep is disabled.
p This function is available for AVIC-Z140BH
only.
4 To finish the setting, touch [OK].
Changing the preinstalled
splash screen
You can change the splash screen to the other
images preinstalled in the navigation system.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Splash Screen].
The Select Splash Screen screen appears.
3 Touch the image to use as the splash
screen from the list.
The image is displayed on the screen.
4 Touch [OK].
The image is set as the splash screen, and the
System Settings screen returns.
Changing to the splash screen
stored in the SD memory card
You can change the splash screen to other
images stored in the SD memory card. Copy
your chosen image to the SD memory card,
and select the image to import.
p Splash screen images should be used with-
in the following formats;
! BMP or JPEG files
! Allowable horizontal and vertical size
are 2 592 pixels x 1 944 pixels or smaller
! Allowable data size is 6 MB or smaller
p Proper compatibility with allowable files is
not guaranteed.
p Imported original images will be stored in
the built-in memory, but the ability to save
these images cannot be guaranteed com-
pletely. If your original image data is de-
leted, insert the SD memory card again
and re-import the original image.
p The maximum number of images, includ-
ing the images in the built-in memory, that
can be imported and displayed on the list is
200.
1 Create a folder named Pictures on the
top-most directory of the SD memory card.
2 Store the picture files in the Pictures
folder.
3 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
4 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
5 Touch [Splash Screen].
The Select Splash Screen screen appears.
6 Touch [Select from SD].
The Select Splash Screen screen appears.
7 Touch the image to use as the splash
screen from the list.
The image is displayed on the screen.
8 Touch [OK].
The image is set as the splash screen, and the
System Settings screen returns.
p Images imported from the SD memory card
are added to the list on Select Splash
Screen.
En
174
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Setting for rear view camera
The following two functions are available. The
rear view camera feature requires a separately
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC5). (For de-
tails, consult your dealer.)
Rear view camera
The navigation system features a function that
automatically switches to the full-screen
image of the rear view camera installed on
your vehicle. When the shift lever is in the RE-
VERSE (R) position, the screen automatically
switches to full-screen rear view camera
image.
Camera for Rear view mode
Rear view can be displayed at all times (e.g.
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a
split screen where map information is partially
displayed. Please be aware that with this set-
ting, camera image is not resized to fit, and
that a portion of what is seen by the camera is
not viewable.
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view
camera on this page.
CAUTION
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the
screen image may appear reversed.
p Immediately verify whether the display
changes to a rear view camera image when
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)
from another position.
p When the screen changes to full-screen
rear view camera image during normal
driving, switch to the opposite setting in
Polarity.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Back Camera].
The Back Camera Settings screen appears.
3 Touch [Camera].
This changes the setting to On.
p You can only switch to Rear View if this
setting is On.
4 Touch [Polarity] to select an appropriate
setting for polarity.
Each time you touch [Polarity] switches be-
tween the following polarity:
! Battery: When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the shift lever
is in the REVERSE (R) position
! GND: When the polarity of the connected
lead is negative while the shift lever is in
the REVERSE (R) position
Adjusting the response
positions of the touch panel
(touch panel calibration)
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the
screen deviate from the actual positions that
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-
sitions of the touch panel screen.
p Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a
ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which
could damage the screen.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Screen Calibration].
A message confirming whether to start the ca-
libration appears.
3 Gently touch the center of + mark dis-
played on the screen.
The target indicates the order.
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-
tion data is saved.
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
# If you press the MODE button, the previous
adjustment position returns.
# If you press and hold the MODE button, the
adjustment is canceled.
En
175
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
Setting the illumination color
The illumination color can be selected from 8
different colors. Furthermore, the illumination
color can be switched between these 8 colors
in order.
Selecting the color from the preset
colors
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Illumi Color].
The Illumination Color screen appears.
3 Touch the color you want.
Available options:
! Colored keys: Selects the desired preset
color
! Memory 1/Memory 2 : Colors registered in
the memory
= For details, refer to Creating a user-de-
fined color and storing it to memory on
this page.
! Scan: Shifts between the eight default col-
ors in sequence gradually.
! Eco: The colors change in the order of
white, red, amber, yellow, green, and blue
as the number of points in the Eco Score
increases.
p The illumination lights in white when
Eco Score is set to Off or when no
route is set.
Creating a user-defined color and
storing it to memory
You can create a user-defined color and set it
as the illumination color.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Illumi Color].
The Illumination Color screen appears.
3 Touch [Custom].
The Illumination Color screen appears.
p If [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-
lected.
4 Touch [+] or [] to adjust the values for
Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite
color.
Watch the illumination of hardware keys while
adjusting the color.
Each time you touch [+]or[] increases or de-
creases the value of the selected item. +31 to
+00 is displayed as the value is increased or
decreased.
p An entry cannot be stored with all of the va-
lues set to +00.
5 Touch [Memory 1] or [Memory 2] to
store the illumination color.
6 Touch [OK] to return to the previous
screen.
Checking the version information
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Service Information].
The Service Information Screen screen ap-
pears.
3 Check the version information.
En
176
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Selecting the video for rear
display
You can choose either to show the same
image as the front screen or to show the se-
lected source on the rear display.
1 Display the AV operation screen.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
2Tap on the left edge of the screen.
p The appearance of this key changes accord-
ing to the current setting.
p While the tuner is receiving an emergency
announcement, traffic announcement, or
news program, the current setting cannot
be changed.
Each touch of changes the settings as fol-
lows:
! Mirror AV: The video on the front screen of
the navigation unit is output to the rear dis-
play
! DISC: The video and sound of the DVDs are
output to the rear display
! iPod: The video and sound of the iPod are
output to the rear display
! AV1: The video and sound of AV1 are out-
put to the rear display
! AV2: The video and sound of AV2 are out-
put to the rear display
p When Mirror AV is selected, the following
restrictions are applied to rear display.
When selecting Rear View in the map
display, nothing is displayed.
All sounds cannot be output for rear dis-
play.
When playing back video files on the ex-
ternal storage device (USB, SD), the
video image is not output.
p When DISC is selected, the following re-
striction is applied to rear display.
When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is
set in the built-in DVD drive, only the
sound is output.
p When iPod is selected, the following re-
striction is applied to rear display.
The video image and sound are output
only when the corresponding setting on
AV1 Input is iPod.
p When AV1 or AV2 is selected, the fol-
lowing restrictions are applied to rear dis-
play.
The video image and sound are output
only when AV1 or AV2 has both
video and sound.
The video image and sound are output
only when the corresponding setting on
AV1 Input or AV2 Input are
Video.
Adjusting the picture
CAUTION
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in
a safe place and apply the parking brake. Refer to
Important Information for the User (a separate
manual).
You can adjust the picture for each source and
rear view camera.
1 Press and hold the MODE button.
The Picture Adjustment screen appears.
2 Touch [+] or [] to adjust the desired
item.
! Brightness: Adjusts the black intensity.
! Contrast: Adjusts the contrast.
! Color: Adjusts the color saturation.
! Color Temp.: Adjusts the tone of color
(which color is emphasized, red or blue).
! Dimmer: Adjusts the brightness of display.
p Touching [Camera] switches to the picture
adjustment screen for the rear view cam-
era.
En
177
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
p Touching [Source] while adjusting the rear
view camera image returns you to the pre-
vious screen.
p The adjustments of Brightness and
Contrast are stored separately when your
vehicles headlights are off (daytime) and
when your vehicles headlights are on
(nighttime). These are switched automati-
cally depending on whether the vehicles
headlights are on or off.
p The adjustments of Dimmer is stored se-
parately when your vehicles headlights are
off (daytime) and when your vehicles head-
lights are on (nighttime). Dimmer is
switched automatically only when the value
of nighttime is lower than the value of day-
time.
p You cannot adjust Color for the source
without a video and navigation map display.
p The setting contents can be memorized se-
parately for the following screen and the
video image.
! Audio source
AM/FM/Tuner or HD Radio/CD/
ROM/iPod (Music)/SD (audio)/USB
(audio)/Bluetooth audio/XM/
SIRIUS/Pandora/aha/EXT1 (audio),
EXT2 (audio)/source off screen/
menu screens/others
! Video source
AV1 and iPod (Video)
DVD-V and DivX
SD (Video) and USB (Video)
AV2 (Video) and EXT1 (Video), EXT2
(Video)
Rear view camera image
! Map screen
p The picture adjustment may not be avail-
able with some rear view cameras.
p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,
you may not be able to adjust the screen at
low temperatures.
3 Touch [+] or [] to adjust the desired
item.
Each touch of [+]or[] increases or decreases
the level of the desired item.
4 Touch
.
The previous screen returns.
Displaying the screen for
AV system settings
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Settings].
The Settings Menu screen appears.
3 Touch [AV Settings].
The AV System Settings menu appears.
4 Touch the item that you want to
change the setting.
# If you touch , the previous screen returns.
Setting video input 1 (AV1)
You can switch this setting according to the
connected component.
p This setting applies to mini-jack input.
En
178
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [AV1 Input].
Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-
ting as follows:
! iPod: iPod connected with the USB Inter-
face cable for iPod (CD-IU51V) (sold sepa-
rately)
! Video: External video component
! Off: No video component is connected.
p Use AV1 Input when connecting CD-
RM10 (sold separately) through the external
video component.
Setting video input 2 (AV2)
You can switch this setting according to the
connected component.
p This setting applies to RCA inputs
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the
back of the system.
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [AV2 Input].
Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-
ting as follows:
! Off: No video component is connected.
! EXT: Pioneer external unit connected with
the RCA video cable
! Video: External video component
Changing the wide screen mode
p You can only adjust Wide Mode when se-
lecting an AV source with video.
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [Wide Mode].
Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-
ting as follows:
! Full (full)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3
TV picture (normal picture) without any
omissions.
! Cinema (cinema)
A picture is enlarged by the same propor-
tion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal di-
rection and by an intermediate proportion
between Full and Zoom in the vertical
direction; ideal for a cinema-sized picture
(wide screen picture) where captions lie
outside the frame.
! Zoom (zoom)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-
portion both vertically and horizontally;
ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide
screen picture).
! Normal (normal)
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving
you no sense of disparity since its propor-
tions are the same as that of the normal
picture.
p Different settings can be stored for each
video source.
p The same setting is automatically applied
for the following grouping.
! DVD-V and DivX
! AV1 and AV2
! EXT1 and EXT2
p When viewing videos, select an appropriate
wide screen mode that matches its original
aspect ratio to view it comfortably.
p Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may
constitute an infringement on the authors
rights protected by the Copyright Law.
p The followings are always viewed at Full.
! Map screen
! Rear view camera image
! Screen of an application available for
Advanced App Mode
En
179
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
Setting the rear output
The navigation systems rear output can be
used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer
connection. If you switch Rear SP to
Sub. W, you can connect a rear speaker lead
directly to a subwoofer without using an auxili-
ary amp.
Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear
full-range speaker connection (Full).
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA
rear output are switched simultaneously in
this setting. (When you use the product
without RCA rear output, this setting only
applies to the rear speaker leads.)
p Rear SP can be set only when the source
is selected to Off.
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
2 Touch [Rear SP].
Each touch of [Rear SP] changes the settings
as follows:
! Full
When no subwoofer is connected to the
rear output, select Full.
! Sub. W
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Sub. W.
Switching the muting/
attenuation timing
You can mute the AV source volume or attenu-
ate the output signal.
p Even if this setting is Off, the navigation
system will mute or attenuate the AV
source volume when the mute signal is out-
put via MUTE lead.
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
2 Touch [Mute].
Each touch of [Mute] changes the settings as
follows:
AVIC-Z140BH
! Guide/Tel/VR: The volume is muted or atte-
nuated according to the following condi-
tions.
When the navigation outputs the gui-
dance voice.
When you use a cellular phone via
Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,
incoming call).
When the voice recognition mode is ac-
tivated.
! Tel/VR: The volume is muted or attenuated
according to the following conditions.
When you use a cellular phone via
Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,
incoming call).
When the voice recognition mode is ac-
tivated.
! Off: The volume does not change.
AVIC-X940BT
! Guide/Tel: The volume is muted or attenu-
ated according to the following conditions.
When the navigation outputs the gui-
dance voice.
When you use a cellular phone via
Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,
incoming call).
! Tel: The volume is muted or attenuated
when you use a cellular phone via
Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking, in-
coming call).
! Off: The volume does not change.
p AV source volume returns to normal when
the corresponding action ends.
Switching the muting/
attenuation level
You can select the muting/attenuation level of
Mute. This setting is also effective for a
mute signal that has been received from the
MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.
p This menu is not available when AV source
is Off.
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
En
180
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
2 Touch [Mute Level].
Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-
tings as follows:
! 20dB: The volume becomes 1/10.
! 10dB: The volume becomes 1/3.
! All: The volume becomes 0.
p When you select All, no audio adjust-
ments are possible during the sound is
turned off.
p When you select 20dB or 10dB,no
audio adjustments are possible during the
sound is attenuated.
p AV source volume returns to normal when
the corresponding action ends.
p Even when a mute signal has been received
from MUTE lead connected to the naviga-
tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannot
be attenuated or muted.
Acquiring/Cataloging iPod
music information
p This function is available for AVIC-Z140BH
only.
If you always set the language other than US
English on Voice Language, this setting is
unnecessary.
Unless VR Catalog Mode is turned off, this
navigation system tries to acquire the informa-
tion needed to operate iPod with voice com-
mands. It may take a short period of time to
transfer the information. Change the setting
according to your usage.
The navigation system starts acquiring/catalo-
ging music information (1) when the iPod is
connected or when the system boots up while
the iPod is connected and (2) when iPod is the
selected and displayed AV Source, unless VR
Catalog Mode is turned off.
p This function is available when Change
Control Mode is set to Navi.
p If you do not use iPod, this setting is un-
necessary.
p During transfer, the following iPod opera-
tions are not available.
Setting the shuffle play for music
Displaying the top category menu
Switching the operation screen
p Once the cataloging is completed, you can
deactivate VR Catalog Menu until you
update the content/data on iPod. If you up-
date the iPod data, activate VR Catalog
Menu again to transfer the music infor-
mation and synchronize the music informa-
tion for voice commands with the data on
iPod.
p After you select Off in VR Catalog
Mode, the system doesnt catalog the
data on the iPod. In such case, the pre-
viously cataloged data are available as
voice commands.
p Once you start the cataloging process, only
a few basic voice commands can be used
for iPod until the process has completely
finished.
p If unreadable characters are included in
the data on your iPod, names or types may
not be available as voice commands.
Important Notice regarding Voice
Control for iPods
Voice Control for iPods may be limited if cata-
loging of iPod content is not completed. Cata-
loging of iPod content only occurs when the
system is in AV Source & Contents mode
and the iPod is the selected and AV
Source screen displayed. Cataloging of iPod
content will not occur if the system is off, if
any other AV Source & Contents is selected
(aside from iPod), or if the system is in any
other mode (aside from AV Source & Con-
tents mode) such as Destination Menu,
Settings Menu, Phone Menu or the map
screen. If you wish to use Voice Control for all
iPod content, it is recommended that you first
connect your iPod, select iPod as the AV
source, and keep the iPod screen displayed
until cataloging is completed. Cataloging of
iPod content should only take a few minutes,
and will depend on the size of the content
stored on your iPod. A message will be dis-
played when cataloging is complete.
En
181
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
2 Touch [VR Catalog Menu].
3 Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-
vate VR Catalog Mode.
# If you touch [Pause], the cataloging of iPod
stops.
If you want to restart the cataloging of iPod,
touch [Restart].
Displaying your DivX VOD
registration code
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this navigation system, you first
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD
content provider. You do this by generating a
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit
to your provider.
p This feature is available when the selected
source is CD, ROM, DivX,orDVD-V.
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
2 Touch [DivX® VOD].
The screen where you can choose to display a
registration code or deregistration code is dis-
played.
p If a registration code has already been acti-
vated, it cannot be displayed.
3 Touch [Registration Code].
Your 10-digit registration code is displayed.
p Make a note of the code as you will need it
when you register with a DivX VOD provider.
Displaying your DivX VOD
deregistration code
A registration code registered with a deregis-
tration code can be deleted.
p This feature is available when the selected
source is CD, ROM, DivX,orDVD-V.
1 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
2 Touch [DivX® VOD].
The screen where you can choose to display a
registration code or deregistration code is dis-
played.
p If a registration code has not been acti-
vated, the deregistration code is not dis-
played.
3 Touch [Deregistration Code].
Your 8-digit deregistration code is displayed.
p Make a note of the code as you will need it
when you deregister with a DivX VOD provi-
der.
Selecting the smartphone
connection method
In order to use the smartphone application on
this navigation system, you need to select the
method for connecting your smartphone.
= For details, refer to Starting procedure on
page 133.
Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Settings].
The Settings Menu screen appears.
En
182
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
3 Touch [AV Sound].
The AV Sound Settings screen appears.
p You cannot make adjustments in the follow-
ing situations:
! AV source is Off.
! During muting/attenuation
4 Touch the item that you want to
change the setting.
# If you touch , the previous screen returns.
Using balance adjustment
You can select a fader/balance setting that
provides an ideal listening environment in all
occupied seats.
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on the previous page.
2 Touch [FAD/BAL].
When Sub. W is selected in Rear SP,
[Balance] will be displayed instead of
[FAD/BAL] and front/rear speaker balance
cannot be adjusted.
= For details, refer to Setting the rear output
on page 180.
3 Touch [a]or[b] to adjust front/rear
speaker balance.
Each time you touch [a]or[b], the front/rear
speaker balance moves towards the front or
the rear.
Front: 15 to Rear: 15 is displayed as the
front/rear speaker balance moves from front to
rear.
Set Front: and Rear: to 0 when using a
two-speaker system.
4 Touch [c]or[d] to adjust left/right
speaker balance.
Each time you touch [c]or[d], the left/right
speaker balance moves towards the left or the
right.
Left: 15 to Right: 15 is displayed as the
left/right speaker balance moves from left to
right.
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics
as desired.
Recalling equalizer curves
There are seven stored equalizer curves that
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list
of the equalizer curves:
Equalizer curve
S.Bass (Super Bass) is a curve in which only low-
pitched sound is boosted.
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are boosted.
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.
En
183
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
Equalizer curve
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the
human vocal range, is boosted.
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each
source.
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all
AV source.
p When Flat is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
Flat and a set equalizer curve.
p You cannot select Custom1 and Cus-
tom2 when Auto EQ is On.
= For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-
justed equalizer on the next page.
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
2 Touch [EQ].
3 Touch the equalizer you want.
p If Auto EQ has been set to On, an image
corresponding to each equalizer curve you
selected appears.
= For details of the operations, refer to Adjust-
ing the equalizer curve automatically (Auto
EQ) on the next page.
Customizing the equalizer curves
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer
curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be
made with a 8-band graphic equalizer.
p This function is not available when Auto
EQ is On.
= For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-
justed equalizer on the next page.
The difference between Custom1 and
Custom2
! A separate Custom1 curve can be cre-
ated for each source. If you make adjust-
ments when a curve S.Bass (Super Bass),
Powerful, Natural, Vocal, Flat,or
Custom1 is selected, the equalizer curve
settings will be memorized in Custom1.
! A Custom2 curve can be created com-
mon to all sources. If you make adjust-
ments when Custom2 curve is selected,
the Custom2 curve will be updated.
! The Custom1 curve is applied to each of
the source selected, but you can apply the
same curve to the following sources.
AM and FM
EXT1 and EXT2
AV1 and AV2
CD, ROM, DVD-V, and DivX
SD and USB
Audio (Bluetooth audio), Pandora
(Bluetooth connection) and aha
(Bluetooth connection)
iPod, Pandora (iPhone) and aha
(iPhone)
p The different curve can be memorized
between iPod and USB.
En
184
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
2 Touch [EQ].
3 Touch one of the keys to select a curve
that you want to use as the basis of custo-
mizing.
4 Touch [Customize].
5 Touch the frequency that you want to
adjust the level.
6 Touch [a]or[b] to adjust the level of
the equalizer band.
Each time you touch [a]or[b], the level of
the equalizer band increases or decreases.
Using the auto-adjusted equalizer
You can set the auto-adjusted equalizer to suit
the vehicles acoustics. To use this function,
the vehicles acoustics must be measured in
advance.
= For details of the operations, refer to Adjust-
ing the equalizer curve automatically (Auto
EQ) on this page.
p To manually adjust the equalizer curve, set
Auto EQ to Off.
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
2 Touch [EQ].
3 Touch the key next to Auto EQ to
turn the auto-adjusted equalizer on or off.
4 Select the equalizer curve.
Adjusting the equalizer curve
automatically (Auto EQ)
By measuring the vehicles acoustics, the
equalizer curve can be adjusted automatically
to suit the interior of the vehicle.
WARNING
A loud tone (noise) may be emitted from the
speakers when measuring the vehicles acous-
tics. Never perform the Auto EQ measurement
while driving.
CAUTION
! Thoroughly check the conditions before per-
forming Auto EQ, as the speakers may be da-
maged if this is performed under the following
conditions:
When the speakers are incorrectly con-
nected. (For example, when a rear speaker
is connected as a subwoofer output.)
When a speaker is connected to a power
amp delivering output higher than the
speakers maximum input power capabil-
ity.
! If the microphone for acoustical measure-
ment (sold separately) is not placed in an ap-
propriate location, the measurement tone may
become loud and measurement may take a
long time, resulting in battery drainage. Be
sure to place the microphone in the specified
location.
Before operating the Auto EQ function
! Perform Auto EQ in as quiet a place as pos-
sible, with the vehicle engine and air condi-
tioning switched off. Also, cut power to car
phones or cellular phones in the vehicle, or
remove them from the vehicle before per-
forming Auto EQ. Sounds other than the
measurement tone (surrounding sounds,
engine sound, telephones ringing, etc.)
may prevent correct measurement of the
vehicles acoustics.
En
185
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
! Be sure to perform Auto EQ using the mi-
crophone for acoustical measurement
(sold separately). Using another micro-
phone may prevent measurement, or result
in incorrect measurement of the vehicles
acoustics.
! To perform Auto EQ, the front speakers
must be connected.
! When this navigation system is connected
to a power amp with input level control,
Auto EQ may not be able to be performed if
the power amps input level is set below
the standard level.
! When this navigation system is connected
to a power amp with an LPF, turn the LPF
off before performing Auto EQ. Also, set
the cut-off frequency for the built-in LPF of
an active subwoofer to the highest fre-
quency.
! The distance has been calculated by com-
puter to provide the optimum delay to en-
sure accurate results. Do not change this
value.
The reflected sound within the vehicle is
strong and delays occur.
The LPF on active subwoofers or exter-
nal amps delay the lower sounds.
! If an error occurs during measurement, a
message appears and measurement is
canceled. Check the following before mea-
suring the vehicles acoustics.
Front speakers (left/right)
Rear speakers (left/right)
Noise
Microphone for acoustical measure-
ment (sold separately)
Low battery
Performing Auto EQ
p Auto EQ changes the audio settings as fol-
lows:
! Auto EQ on the EQ Menu screen is
set to On.
= For details, refer to Using the auto-ad-
justed equalizer on the previous
page.
! The fader/balance settings return to the
center position.
= For details, refer to Using balance ad-
justment on page 183.
! The equalizer curve switches to Flat.
= For details, refer to Using the equali-
zer on page 183.
! The front and rear speakers will automa-
tically be adjusted to a high pass filter
setting.
p Previous settings for Auto EQ will be over-
written.
p For AVIC-Z140BH users
Do not press the h button to open or close
the panel when you are using the micro-
phone.
1 Stop the vehicle in a place that is quiet,
close all the doors, windows and sun roof,
and then turn the engine off.
If the engine is left running, engine noise may
prevent correct Auto EQ.
p If driving restrictions are detected during
measurement, measurement is canceled.
2 Fix the microphone for acoustical mea-
surement (sold separately) in the center of
the headrest of the drivers seat, facing for-
ward.
The Auto EQ may differ depending on where
you place the microphone. If desired, place
the microphone on the front passenger seat
and perform Auto EQ.
3 Turn the ignition switch to ON or ACC.
If the vehicles air conditioner or heater is
turned on, turn it off. Noise from the fan in the
air conditioner or heater may prevent correct
Auto EQ.
En
186
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
4 Switch the AV source to Off.
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-
playing the AV operation screen on page 74.
5 Set the video setting for the rear dis-
play to Mirror AV.
= For details of the operations, refer to Select-
ing the video for rear display on page 177.
6 Display the AV System Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV system settings on page 178.
7 Touch [Auto EQ Meas.].
The Auto EQ Measurement screen ap-
pears.
8 Plug the microphone into the mini-jack
connector.
USB and mini-jack connector
Microphone for acoustical measurement (sold sepa-
rately)
9 Touch [Start].
A 10-second countdown starts.
10 Exit the vehicle and keep the door
closed until the countdown finishes.
When the countdown is over, a measurement
tone (noise) is emitted from the speakers and
the Auto EQ measurement begins.
11 Wait until the measurement is com-
pleted.
When Auto EQ is completed, a message is dis-
played indicating that the measurement is
completed.
p If the vehicles acoustics cannot be mea-
sured correctly, an error message will be
displayed.
p The measurement time varies depending
on the type of vehicle.
p To stop the measurement, touch [Stop].
12 Touch [OK].
13 Store the microphone carefully in the
glove compartment or another safe place.
If the microphone is subjected to direct sun-
light for an extended period of time, high tem-
peratures may cause distortion, color change
or malfunction.
Using sonic center control
Sound that is suited for the listening position
can easily be created with this function.
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
2 Touch [Sonic Center Control].
3 Touch [c]or[d] to select a listening po-
sition.
p The larger the value of the range: Left7 to
Right7 setting, the greater the delay of
the speaker output.
p When Left is set, the left speaker output
is delayed. When Right is set, the right
speaker output is delayed.
Adjusting loudness
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
2 Touch [Loudness].
Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is
selected in the following order:
Off Low Mid High
En
187
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
Using subwoofer output
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-
woofer output mechanism, which can be
turned on or off.
p This function is not available when Sub
Woofer is Off.
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
2 Touch [Sub Woofer].
3 Touch [On].
The subwoofer output is turned on.
# If you touch [Off], the subwoofer output is
turned off.
4 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select
the phase of subwoofer output.
5 Touch [+] or [] next to Level to adjust
the output level.
+6 to 24 is displayed as the level is in-
creased or decreased.
6 Touch [c]or[d] next to
Frequency(Hz) to select cut-off fre-
quency.
Each time you touch [c]or[d], cut-off fre-
quencies are selected in the following order:
50Hz 63Hz 80Hz 100Hz 125Hz
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-
lected range are output from the subwoofer.
Using the high pass filter
When you cut lower sounds from the subwoo-
fer output frequency, activate HPF (high pass
filter). Only frequencies higher than those in
the selected range are output from the front or
rear speakers.
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
2 Touch [HPF].
Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
Off 50Hz 63Hz 80Hz 100Hz
125Hz
Adjusting source levels
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources.
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume
level, which remains unchanged.
p You cannot select [SLA] when the FM tuner
is selected as the AV source.
1 Compare the FM tuner volume level
with the level of the source you wish to ad-
just.
2 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
3 Touch [SLA].
4 Touch [+] or [] to adjust the source vo-
lume.
+8dB to 8dB is displayed as the source
volume is increased or decreased.
The following AV sources are set to the same
source level adjustment volume automatically.
! CD, ROM, and DivX
! SD and USB
! Audio (Bluetooth audio), Pandora
(Bluetooth connection) and aha (Bluetooth
connection)
! Audio (Bluetooth audio), Pandora
(Bluetooth connection) and aha (Bluetooth
connection)
! AV1 and AV2
En
188
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
! EXT1 and EXT2
p The different source volume level can be set
between iPod and USB.
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)
You can enhance bass sounds that are often
muted by driving noise.
1 Display the AV Sound Settings
screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
AV sound settings on page 182.
2 Touch [Bass Booster].
3 Touch [+] or [] to adjust the range from
0to6.
Replicating the settings
You can import settings you have made on the
utility program AVIC FEEDS which is available
separately to the navigation system.
1 Use AVIC FEEDS to replicate the set-
tings and store them on an SD memory
card.
2 Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on
page 18.
3 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
4 Touch [Settings].
The Settings Menu screen appears.
5 Touch [Setting Replicator].
A message confirming whether to update the
settings appears.
6 Touch [Yes].
Update starts.
After the settings are updated, a message con-
firming whether to restart the navigation sys-
tem appears.
7 Touch [OK].
The navigation system restarts.
Tur ning off the screen
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,
you can turn off the screen display without
turning off the voice guidance.
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Settings].
The Settings Menu screen appears.
3 Touch [Screen Off].
The screen is turned off.
p Touch anywhere on the screen to turn it
back on.
En
189
Chapter
31
Customizing preferences
Customizing preferences
p This function is available for AVIC-Z140BH
only.
To Ensure Safe Driving
CAUTION
For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the
voice operation as much as possible while
driving.
If you use voice operation, select US English
or US English (Samantha):TTS in Voice
Language of Regional Settings. If you se-
lect other languages, voice operation will not
be available.
Basics of the voice operation
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest
in voice recognition technology. You can use
voice commands to operate many of its func-
tions. This chapter describes where you can
use voice commands, and also what com-
mands the system accepts.
You can use voice commands to operate the
following functions:
! Hands-free phoning
! Switching the AV source
! Operating the iPod
p This function is not available while catalo-
ging of iPod is in progress.
Flow of the voice operation
You can start the voice operation any time
even when the map screen is displayed or AV
is operating. (Some operations are not avail-
able.) The basic steps of the voice operations
are as follows.
1 Switch the screen to map screen or AV op-
eration screen.
j
2 Press the button to activate voice oper-
ations.
j
3 Speak a command into the microphone
after the beep.
When the command is recognized, the na-
vigation system displays next options on
the screen, and pronounces it in some
cases.
j
4 Repeat previous step as necessary.
j
5 The requested operation will be carried out.
p The voice operation may not be operable for a
minute after the navigation system has booted
up.
p The voice operation will be activated 30 sec-
onds after the map screen is displayed.
If the
button does not respond, display the
disclaimer screen and then touch [OK]. The
map screen is displayed.
Starting the voice operation
% Press the button when the map
screen or the AV operation screen is dis-
played.
The voice operation screen appears.
1
2
3
4
1 Voice help menu
Displays a list of commands for the voice
operation.
En
190
Chapter
32
Operating your navigation system with voice
2 Voice operation condition indicator
When
is indicated, the navigation sys-
tem can recognize your voice commands.
3
Touch to listen to the brief operating in-
struction.
4
Touch to cancel the voice operation.
p You can cancel the voice operation feature
at any time by saying Cancel. After you
cancel voice operations, the display returns
to the screen displayed before the voice op-
eration screen appeared.
How to use the voice operation
Calling the entry on the phone book
A method for dialing the entry named Nancy
is described here along with an operational ex-
ample.
1 Press the MODE button to display the
map screen or the AV operation screen.
2 Press the
button to activate voice
operations.
3 Say Call Nancy to make a call.
A message confirming whether to dial appear-
s.
4 Say Yes.
Dialing starts.
Operating iPod by voice
You can play music using voice operation from
the iPod connected to the navigation system.
p To use the content/data on the iPod for
voice operation, transfer the data to this
system first.
= For details, refer to Acquiring/Cataloging
iPod music information on page 181.
Examples of voice operation of the iPod are
shown below. (A method for playing the album
title named Pioneer is described here, along
with an operational example.)
1 Press the MODE button to display the
map screen or the AV operation screen.
2 Press the
button to activate voice
operations.
3 Say Change Source to display the AV
source selection screen.
4 Say iPod on the selection screen to
switch the AV source to iPod.
p Touching the item on the screen also en-
ables you to select the desired AV source.
5 Press the button to activate voice
operations.
6 Say Play the album Pioneer to play-
back the album name Pioneer.
If the command is recognized properly, play-
back starts from the first song of Pioneer.
En
191
Chapter
32
Operating your navigation system with voice
Operating your navigation system with voice
Available basic voice commands
The navigation system can also recognize the words in the following list.
p Terms written in italics are voice commands.
Basic commands
Voice commands and operations
Back d The previous screen returns.
Cancel d Cancels the voice operation.
Help d Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice.
Next page, Previous page d Switches the page.
Last page, First page d Switches to the last or first page.
Voice operation for the iPod
For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Playlist name>, <Genre name> shown on the following chart, say the
name stored in the iPod.
p Playback of iPod movies is not available using voice commands.
Voice commands and operations
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.
Resume d Resumes the song or the video currently playing.
Pause d Pauses the song or the video currently playing.
Next song d Plays the next song.
Previous song d Plays the previous song or returns to the beginning of the song currently playing.
Play artists d Displays the artist list d Say the artist name that you want to play.
Play the artist <Artist name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected artist.
Play albums d Displays the album list d Say the album title that you want to play.
Play the album <Album name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected album.
Play playlists d Displays the playlist d Say the playlist that you want to play.
Play the playlist <Playlist name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected playlist.
Play genres d Displays the genre list d Say the genre that you want to play.
Play the genre <Genre name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected genre.
Browse artists d Displays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say desired
voice commands.
Browse the artist <Artist name> d Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. d Say desired voice commands.
Browse albums d Displays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the de-
sired voice commands.
Browse the album <Album name> d Displays the song list of the selected album. d Tap the song that you want to
play.
En
192
Chapter
32
Operating your navigation system with voice
Voice commands and operations
Browse playlists d Displays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired
voice commands.
Browse the playlist <Playlist name> d Displays the song list of the selected playlist. d Tap the song that you want
to play.
Browse genre d Displays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired
voice commands.
Browse the genre <Genre name> d Displays the song list of the selected genre list. d Tap the song that you want
to play.
Play more music artist d Plays the songs related to the currently playing artist.
Play more music album d Plays the songs related to the currently playing album.
Play more music genre d Plays the songs related to the currently playing genre.
Next page, Previous page d Displays the previous or next page of the selection list. (*1)
First page, Last page d Displays the first or last page of the selection list. (*1)
(*1) Voice commands are available only when the selection list is displayed.
Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod)
AV source selection
Voice commands and operations
Change Source to DISC d Switches the AV source to Disc.
Change Source to Tuner d Switches the AV source to Tuner.
Change Source to XM Satellite Radio d Switches the AV source to XM.
Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio d Switches the AV source to SIRIUS .
Change Source to SD d Switches the AV source to SD.
Change Source to USB d Switches the AV source to USB.
Change Source to iPod d Switches the AV source to iPod.
Change Source to Bluetooth Audio d Switches the AV source to Audio (Bluetooth audio).
Built-in DVD drive, external storage device (USB, SD)
Voice commands and operations
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.
Pause d Pauses the track or file currently playing.
Resume d Resumes the track or file currently playing.
Next song d Plays the next track or file.
Previous song d Plays the previous track or file, or returns to the beginning of the track or file currently playing.
En
193
Chapter
32
Operating your navigation system with voice
Operating your navigation system with voice
Voice commands related to hands-free phoning
p You can make a phone call by voice dialing if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is being
paired with the navigation system.
p For <entrys name> shown on the following chart, say the name of the entry stored in Contacts.
p For <phone number> shown on the following chart, say the desired phone number.
Voice commands and operations
Call <entrys name> d Makes a call to the entry (*2).
Call <entrys name> general d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the general
phone number of the entry (*3).
Call <entrys name> mobile d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the cellular
phone number of the entry (*3).
Call <entrys name> home d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the home
phone number of the entry (*3).
Call <entrys name> work d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the office phone
number of the entry (*3).
Call <entrys name> other d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the other phone
number of the entry (*3).
Call <phone number> d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the phone number.
Make a call d Say the phone number you want to call d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say
Yes d The system starts dialing to the number.
Make a call d Say the name of entry stored on Contacts you want to call d Displays the message confirming
whether to dial d Say Yes d The system starts dialing to the number (*2).
List outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (Dialed Calls) to select the number and call (*4).
List recent calls d Incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (Received Calls) to select the num-
ber and call (*4).
List recent calls d Outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (Dialed Calls) to select the number
and call (*4).
List recent incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (Received Calls) to select the number and
call (*4).
(*2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone
number.
(*3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry. In
such case, say the type of phone number.
(*4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list.
Tips for the voice operation
For your voice commands to be correctly re-
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-
tions are suitable for recognition.
Close the vehicle windows
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.
En
194
Chapter
32
Operating your navigation system with voice
Position the microphone carefully
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front
of the driver.
Pause before giving a command
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition
to fail.
Pronounce your commands carefully
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.
En
195
Chapter
32
Operating your navigation system with voice
Operating your navigation system with voice
Setting the anti-theft function
You can set a password for the navigation sys-
tem. If the back-up lead is cut after the pass-
word is set, the navigation system prompts for
the password at the time of next boot up.
Setting the password
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Settings].
The Settings Menu screen appears.
p This can also be operated using the Short-
cut Menu screen.
3 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and
then touch and hold Area3.
Area1 Area2 Area3
4 Touch [Set Password].
The password setting screen appears.
5 Enter the password you want to set.
p 5 to 16 characters can be entered for a
password.
6 Touch [OK].
7 Reenter the password to confirm the
setting.
8 Touch [OK].
Password protection is applied.
p If you want to change the password cur-
rently set, enter the current password and
then enter the new one.
Entering the password
On the password input screen, you must enter
the current password. If you enter an incorrect
password three times, the screen is locked
and operations using touch panel keys are dis-
abled.
1 Enter the password.
2 Touch [OK].
If you enter the correct password, the naviga-
tion system will be unlocked.
Deleting the password
The current password can be deleted.
1 Press the HOME button to display the
Top Menu screen.
2 Touch [Settings] on the Top Menu .
3 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and
then touch and hold Area3.
4 Touch [Clear password].
The password setting screen appears.
5 Enter the current password.
6 Touch [OK].
7 Touch [Yes].
The message for deletion appears and then
the current password is deleted.
Forgotten password
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-
vice Station.
En
196
Chapter
33
Other functio ns
Returning the navigation
system to the default or
factory settings
You can return settings or recorded content to
the default or factory settings. There are some
methods to clear user data, and the situations
and the cleared content are different for each
method. For information regarding the content
that is cleared by each method, see the list
presented later.
Method 1: Remove the vehicle battery
This transforms the system into the same
state as when the navigation system is unin-
stalled.
Method 2: Touch [Restore Factory
Settings]
= For details, refer to Restoring the default set-
ting on this page.
Method 3: Touch [Clear user information]
on the Select Items to Reset screen
= For details, refer to Returning the navigation
system to the initial state on this page.
Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the Select
Items to Reset screen
= For details, refer to Returning the navigation
system to the initial state on this page.
Restoring the default setting
Resets various settings registered to the navi-
gation system and restores them to the default
or factory settings.
p Be sure to read Setting items to be deleted
before you perform this operation.
= For details, refer to Setting items to be
deleted on the next page.
1 Display the System Settings screen.
= For details, refer to Displaying the screen for
system settings on page 171.
2 Touch [Restore Factory Settings].
The message confirming whether to restore
the settings appears.
3 Touch [Yes].
Returning the navigation
system to the initial state
You can return settings or recorded content to
the default or factory settings.
p Be sure to read Setting items to be deleted
before you perform this operation.
= For details, refer to Setting items to be
deleted on the next page.
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and
apply the parking brake.
2 Turn the ignition switch off and back
on.
The navigation system restarts, and the splash
screen appears.
3 Press and hold the MODE button and
the TRK (m) button while the splash
screen appears.
p For users of AVIC-Z140BH, press the MODE
button and the TRK (c) button.
The Select Items to Reset screen appears.
4 Touch [Clear user information] or
[Reset].
The message confirming whether to erase the
data appears.
5 Touch [Yes].
The recorded contents are cleared.
En
197
Chapter
33
Other functions
Other functio ns
Setting items to be deleted
The items to be deleted vary depending on the reset method. The items listed in the following table re-
turn to the default or factory settings.
Any items not listed below will be retained.
: The setting will be retained.
1: The setting will be cleared and returned to the default or factory settings.
p Bold indicates functions or command names.
! Method 1: Remove the vehicle battery
! Method 2: Touch [Restore Factory Settings]
! Method 3: Touch [Clear user information] on the Select Items to Reset screen
! Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the Select Items to Reset screen
Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4
Map function
View mode and scale setting on
the map
——11
Direction of the map ——11
Last cursor position on the map
screen
111
Route setting
Current route 1 11
Guidance state of the current
route
——11
Vehicle position information ——11
Options 111
Others
Keyboard 111
Learnt data used in Learning
Route
1 11
Shortcut Menu 111
Destination
Point registered in Favorites ——1
History ——1
Stored city history ——1
Traffic Settings Displayed Traffic Info 111
Map Settings
View Mode ——11
Other settings 111
Navi Settings
3D Calibration Status ———
Demo Mode 1111
Set Home ——1
Modify Current Location ——11
Other settings 111
En
198
Chapter
33
Other functio ns
Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4
System Settings
Program Language, Voice
Language
——11
Time ——11
Back Camera 1 ———
Other settings 111
Bluetooth Set-
tings
All settings (*1) 111
Phone Menu All settings (*1) 111
Other functions Anti-theft password ————
(*1) All stored data of 5 users is deleted.
AV functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Method 4
Volume 1 ———
AV Settings
Wide Mode, Mute, VR Cata-
log Menu
1 11
Other settings 1 ———
AV Sound All settings 1 ———
CD, ROM, DVD-V,
DivX, FM, AM,
Audio (Bluetooth
audio)
All settings (*2) 1 ———
SD, USB All settings (*2) 1 11
Other functions
Picture Adjustment 1 ———
Tilt 1 ———
(*2) All settings including the setting on the Function menu are deleted.
En
199
Chapter
33
Other functions
Other functio ns
Troubleshooting
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. If a solution to your problem
cannot be found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.
Problems with the navigation screen
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
The power doesnt turn on. The
navigation system doesnt oper-
ate.
Leads and connectors are incor-
rectly connected.
Confirm once more that all connections are
correct.
The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-
rect fuse with the same rating.
Noise and other factors are causing
the built-in microprocessor to oper-
ate incorrectly.
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off
(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and
turn the power to the navigation system back
on.
You cannot position your vehicle
on the map without a significant
positioning error.
The GPS antenna is in an unsuitable
location.
The quality of signals from the GPS satellites
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-
racy. Check the GPS signal reception and the
position of the GPS antenna if necessary.
Obstacles are blocking signals from
the satellites.
The quality of signals from the GPS satellites
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-
racy. Check the GPS signal reception and the
position of the GPS antenna if necessary, or
continue driving until reception improves.
Keep the antenna clean.
The position of satellites relative to
your vehicle is inadequate.
The quality of signals from the GPS satellites
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-
racy. Continue driving until reception im-
proves.
Signals from the GPS satellites have
been modified to reduce accuracy.
(GPS satellites are operated by the
US Department of Defense, and the
US government reserves the right to
distort positioning data for militar y
reasons. This may lead to greater
positioning errors.)
The quality of signals from the GPS satellites
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-
racy. Wait until reception improves.
If a vehicle phone or cellular phone
is used near the GPS antenna, GPS
reception may be lost temporarily.
The quality of signals from the GPS satellites
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-
racy. When using a cellular phone, keep the
antenna of the cellular phone away from the
GPS antenna.
En
200
Appendix
Appendix
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
You cannot position your vehicle
on the map without a significant
positioning error.
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals.
Signals from the vehicles speed
pulse are not being picked up prop-
erly.
Check that the cables are properly connected.
If necessary, consult the dealer that installed
the system.
The navigation system may not be
mounted securely in your vehicl e.
Check that the navigation system is securely
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer
that installed the system.
The navigation system is installed
with an extreme angle exceeding
the installation angle limitations.
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-
tion system must be installed within the al-
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to
Installation Manual.)
Indication of the position of your ve-
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or
reversing.
Check whether or not the reverse gear signal
input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The
navigation system works properly without the
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will
be adversely affected.)
Eco Graph is not available. The navigation system is unable to
obtain past average fuel mileage
data, so Eco Graph cannot be dis-
played.
Drive about 10 km on a road without obstruc-
tions. Then park your vehicle in a safe place,
turn off the navigation system and turn the
power to the navigation system back on.
The map color does not switch
automatically between daytime
and nighttime.
Day/Night Display is set to
Day.
Check Day/Night Display setting and
make sure Automatic is selected. (Page
169)
The orange/white lead is not con-
nected.
Check the connection.
The screen is too bright. Picture quality adjustment of the
display is not correct.
Adjust the picture quality. (Page 177)
The display is very dim. The vehicles light is turned ON, and
Automatic is selected on Day/
Night Display.
Read about Day/Night Display setting
and, if desired, select Day. (Page 169)
Picture quality adjustment of the
display is not correct.
Adjust the picture quality. (Page 177)
No sounds of AV source are pro-
duced.
The volume level will not rise.
The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.
The attenuator or mute is on. Turn the attenuator or mute off.
A speaker lead is disconnected. Check the connection.
The volume of navigation gui-
dance and beeps cannot be ad-
justed.
VOL (+/) button or Multi-control is
used to adjust the volume.
Turn the volume up or down using Volume
on the System Settings menu. (Page 173)
The person on the other end of
the phone call cannot hear the
conversation due to an echo.
The voice from the person on the
other end of the phone call is output
from the speakers and then picked
up by the microphone again, creat-
ing an echo.
Use the following methods to reduce the
echo:
Lower the volume on the receiver
Have both parties pause slightly before
speaking
En
201
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
Theres no picture. The parking brake cord is not con-
nected.
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply
the parking brake.
The parking brake is not applied. Connect the parking brake cord, and apply
the parking brake.
The backlight of the LCD panel is
turned off.
Turn on the backlight. (Page 189)
Rear display picture disappears. The source disc being listened to in
the navigation system has been
ejected.
Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.
This problem may occur when certain con-
nection methods are used.
There is a problem with the rear dis-
play, for example a faulty wiring con-
nection.
Check the rear display and its connection.
An AV source that cannot output to
the rear display is selected.
Select an appropriate AV source.
Nothing is displayed and the
touch panel keys cannot be
used.
The setting for the rear view camera
is incorrect.
Select the appropriate setting for the rear
view camera.
The shift lever was placed in [R]
when the rear view camera was not
connected.
Select the correct polarity setting for Back
Camera. (Page 175)
There is no response when the
touch panel keys are touched, or
a different key responds.
The touch panel keys deviate from
the actual positions that respond to
your touch for some reason.
Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 175)
The external storage device
(USB, SD) cannot be used.
The USB storage device has been
removed immediately after plugging
it.
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off
(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and
turn the power to the navigation system back
on.
Problems in the AV screen
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
CD or DVD playback is not pos-
sible.
The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.
The disc is dirty. Clean the disc.
The disc is cracked or otherwise da-
maged.
Insert a normal, round disc.
The files on the disc are an irregular
file format.
Check the file format.
The disc format cannot be played
back.
Replace the disc.
The loaded disc is a type this system
cannot play.
Check what type of disc it is. (Page 215)
The screen is covered by a cau-
tion message and the video can-
not be shown.
The parking brake lead is not con-
nected or applied.
Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and
apply the parking brake.
The parking brake interlock is acti-
vated.
Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply
the parking brake.
En
202
Appendix
Appendix
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
No video output from connected
equipment.
No video output from connected
iPod.
AV1 Input or AV2 Input setting
is incorrect.
Correct the settings. (Page 155)
The connection of the USB interface
cable for iPod is incorrect.
Connect both the USB plug and the RCA
cable side. (If only one of these connection
has been made, the iPod will not work prop-
erly.) (Page 22)
The audio or video skips. The navigation system is not firmly
secured.
Secure the navigation system firmly.
No sounds are produced.
The volume level will not rise.
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.
The system is performing still, slow
motion, or frame-by-frame playback
with DVD-Video.
There is no sound during still, slow motion, or
frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.
The system is paused or performing,
fast reverse or forward during the
disc playback.
For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),
there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.
The icon 9 is displayed, and op-
eration is not possible.
The operation is not compatible
with the video configuration.
This operation is not possible. (For example,
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)
The picture stops (pauses) and
the navigation system cannot be
operated.
The reading of data is impossible
during disc playback.
Stop playback once, and start playback again.
The picture is stretched, with in-
correct aspect ratio.
The aspect setting is incorrect for
the display.
Select the appropriate setting for that image.
(Page 179, Page 110)
A parental lock message is dis-
played and DVD playback is not
possible.
Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the level.
(Page 110)
Parental lock for DVD playback
cannot be canceled.
The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 110)
Playback is not with the audio
language and subtitle language
settings selected in DVD/
DivX® Setup.
The DVD playing does not feature
dialog or subtitles in the language
selected in DVD/DivX® Setup.
Switching to a selected language is not possi-
ble if the language selected in DVD/DivX®
Setup is not recorded on the disc. (Page
109)
The picture is extremely unclear/
distorted and dark during play-
back.
The disc features a signal to prohibit
copying. (Some discs may have
this.)
Since the navigation system is compatible
with the copy guard analog copy protect sys-
tem, the picture may suffer from horizontal
stripes or other imperfections when a disc
with that kind of protection signal is viewed
on some displays. This does not mean the na-
vigation system is malfunctioning.
iPod cannot be operated. The iPod is frozen. ! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface
cable for iPod.
! Update the iPod software version.
An error has occurred. ! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface
cable for iPod.
! Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn
off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to
off (ACC OFF). Then start the engine again,
and turn the power to the navigation system
back on.
! Update the iPod software version.
En
203
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Problems with the phone screen
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
Dialing is not possible because
the touch panel keys for dialing
are inactive.
Your phone is out of range for ser-
vice.
Retry after re-entering the range for service.
The connection between the cellular
phone and the navigation system
cannot be established now.
Perform the connection process.
If the screen becomes frozen...
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to off
(ACC OFF). Then start the engine again, and
turn the power to the navigation system back
on.
En
204
Appendix
Appendix
Messages for navigation functions
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to
identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action.
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a
case, follow the instructions given on the display.
Message Cause Action (Reference)
Route calculation was not
possible.
Route calculation has failed be-
cause of a malfunction in map data,
software, or hardware.
! Change the destination.
! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-
sage persists.
Route calculation not possi-
ble: destination is too far.
The destination is too far. Set a destination closer to the starting point.
Route calculation not possi-
ble: destination is too close.
The destination is too close. Set a destination farther from the starting
point.
Route calculation not possi-
ble: navigation cannot be pro-
vided around destination or
starting point.
The destination, waypoint(s), or
starting point are in an area where
no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and
the route calculation is impossible.
! Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.
! Reset the destination after you drive the ve-
hicle to any road.
Route to destination cannot
be calculated.
The destination or waypoint(s) are in
an isolated island, etc. without a
ferry and the route calculation is im-
possible. If there is no road con-
nected to your starting point or
destination, this message will ap-
pear.
Change the destination.
Failed to make the route pro-
file.
In rare cases, a route calculation
error may occur.
! Retry.
! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-
sage persists.
No picture folder. Save jpeg
file to /Pictures/ folder
Cannot load the image because
Pictures folder is not found in the
inserted external storage device.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
(Page 174)
Pictures folder exists on the SD
memor y card but there is no load-
able data in the folder.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
(Page 174)
Data Read error. Failed to read the data for some rea-
son.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
(Page 174)
The file is corrupt The data is damaged or an attempt
was made to set an image file that
was not made to specifications as
the splash screen.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
(Page 174)
En
205
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Message Cause Action (Reference)
Connection failed. The cellular phones Bluetooth wire-
less technology is turned off.
Activate the target phones Bluetooth wire-
less technology.
The cellular phone is paired (con-
nected) with another device.
Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.
Rejection has been received from
the cellular phone.
Operate the target phone and accept the con-
nection request from the navigation system.
(Furthermore, check the connection settings
on your cellular phone.)
The target cellular phone cannot be
found.
Check whether your cellular phone is acti-
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-
lar phone is not too far.
Could not find any available
phone.
No available phone exists in the sur-
roundings when the system
searches for connectable cellular
phones featuring Bluetooth wireless
technology.
! Activate the target phones Bluetooth wire-
less technology.
! Check whether your cellular phone is acti-
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-
lar phone is not too far.
Registration failed. The cellular phones Bluetooth wire-
less technology is turned off during
the registration step.
Keep turning the target phones Bluetooth
wireless technology on during the registra-
tion.
Rejection by the cellular phone has
received.
Operate the target phone and accept the re-
gistration request from the navigation system.
(Furthermore, check the connection settings
on your cellular phone.)
Registration step has failed for
some reason.
Retry the registration and if the registration
still fails, try registering using your cellular
phone.
En
206
Appendix
Appendix
Messages for audio functions
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error
persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center.
The messages in () will appear on the rear display.
Built-in DVD drive
Message Cause Action (Reference)
Reading error
(ERROR-02-XX)
Dirty Clean the disc.
Scratched disc Replace the disc.
The disc is loaded upside down. Check that the disc is loaded correctly.
Playback error. Please remove
the disc.
There is an electrical or mechanical
error.
! Replace the disc.
! Set the ACC to off and then set it to on
again.
Region code cannot be
matched (DIFFERENT REGION
DISC)
The disc does not have the same re-
gion number as the navigation sys-
tem.
Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the
correct region number.
Unreadable disc (UNPLAYABLE
DISC)
This type of disc cannot be played
by the navigation system.
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-
tem can play. (Page 218, Page 235)
Playback error due to irregu-
lar temperature. Please re-
move the disc. (THERMAL
PROTECTION IN MOTION)
The temperature of the navigation
system is out of the normal operat-
ing range.
Wait until the units temperature returns to
within normal operating limits.
Tracks that cannot be played
back will be skipped (FILE
SKIPPED)
Files that are protected by digital
rights management (DRM).
The protected files are skipped.
Cannot play back all tracks
(PROTECTED DISC)
All the files on the inserted disc are
secured by DRM.
Replace the disc.
Flash write error. Unable to
write to flash memory. (CAN
NOT SAVE DATA)
The playback history for VOD con-
tents cannot be saved for some rea-
son.
! Retry.
! If the message appears frequently, consult
your dealer.
Your device is not authorized
to play this protected DivX
video. (YOUR DEVICE IS NOT
AUTHORIZED TO PLAY THIS
DivX PROTECTED VIDEO)
The device does not match the de-
vice registered with the VOD provi-
der. VOD content cannot be played
back.
Check whether this device has been regis-
tered with the VOD provider.
Video resolution not sup-
ported. (VIDEO RESOLUTION
NOT SUPPORTED)
High definition (HD) DivX video can-
not be played.
Create playable one and retry.
SD/USB/iPod
Message Cause Action (Reference)
Tracks that cannot be played
back will be skipped
Files that are protected by digital
rights management (DRM).
The protected files are skipped.
This type of file cannot be played by
this unit.
Replace it with the playable file. (Page 218,
Page 235)
En
207
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Message Cause Action (Reference)
Cannot play back all tracks All the files on the inserted external
storage device are secured by DRM.
Store playable files.
All of the files cannot be played by
this unit.
Replace it with the playable file. (Page 218,
Page 235)
USB flash drive was discon-
nected for device protection.
Do not connect this USB flash
drive to the unit. To restart
USB, restart the unit.
The USB connector or USB cable is
short-circuited.
Confirm that the USB connector or USB
cable is not caught in something or da-
maged.
The connected USB storage device
consumes more than maximum al-
lowable current.
Disconnect the USB storage device and do
not use it. Turn the ignition switch to off, then
back ACC to on or turn the ignition switch on
and then connect the compliant USB storage
device.
The USB interface cable for iPod is
short-circuited.
Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or
USB cable is not caught in something or da-
maged.
Authorization failure. iPod is
not connected.
The iPod is not compatible with this
navigation system.
Use an iPod of a compatible version.
Communication failure ! Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
! If the message appears frequently, consult
your dealer.
En
208
Appendix
Appendix
Positioning technology
Positioning by GPS
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of
68 900 000 feet (21 000 km), continually broad-
casts radio signals giving time and position in-
formation. This ensures that signals from at
least three can be picked up from any open
area on the grounds surface.
The accuracy of the GPS information depends
on how good the reception is. When the sig-
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.
Positioning by dead reckoning
The built-in sensor in the navigation system
also calculates your position. The current loca-
tion is measured by detecting driving distance
with the speed pulse, the turning direction
with the gyro sensor and inclination of the
road with the G sensor.
The built-in sensor can even calculate
changes of altitude, and correct the discrepan-
cies in the distance traveled caused by driving
along winding roads or up slopes.
If you use this navigation system with connect-
ing the speed pulse, the system will become
more accurate than no connection of speed
pulse. So you connect the speed pulse without
fail to get the accuracy of positioning.
p The position of the speed detection circuit
vary depending on the vehicle model. For
details, consult your authorized Pioneer
dealer or an installation professional.
p Some types of vehicles may not output a
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-
meters per hour. In such a case, the current
location of your vehicle may not be dis-
played correctly while in traffic congestion
or in a parking lot.
How do GPS and dead
reckoning work together?
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-
tem continually compares GPS data with your
estimated position as calculated from the data
of built-in sensor. However, if only the data
from the built-in sensor is available for a long
period, positioning errors are gradually com-
pounded until the estimated position becomes
unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-
nals are available, they are matched with the
data of the built-in sensor and used to correct
it for improved accuracy.
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors
may suddenly increase because of differ-
ence in wheel diameter. Initialize the sensor
status and it may recover the accuracy to
normal condition.
= For details, refer to Clearing status on
page 159.
En
209
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Map matching
As mentioned, the positioning systems used
by this navigation system are susceptible to
certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-
sion, place you in a location on the map where
no road exists. In this situation, the processing
system understands that vehicles travel only
on roads, and can correct your position by ad-
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map
matching.
With map matching
Without map matching
Handling large errors
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by
combining GPS, dead reckoning and map
matching. However, in some situations, these
functions may not work properly, and the error
may become bigger.
When positioning by GPS is
impossible
! GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-
not be received from more than two GPS
satellites.
! In some driving conditions, signals from
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.
In this case, it is impossible for the system
to use GPS positioning.
In tunnels or en-
closed parking
garages
Under elevated
roads or similar
structures
When driving
among high build-
ings
When driving through
a dense forest or tall
trees
! If a car phone or cellular phone is used
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may
be lost temporarily.
! Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or car wax, because this may block
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals, so keep the
antenna clear.
p If a GPS signal has not been received for a
long time, your vehicles actual position
and the current position mark on the map
may diverge considerably or may not be up-
dated. In such case, once GPS reception is
restored, accuracy will be recovered.
En
210
Appendix
Appendix
Conditions likely to cause
noticeable positioning errors
For various reasons, such as the state of the
road you are traveling on and the reception
status of the GPS signal, the actual position of
your vehicle may differ from the position dis-
played on the map screen.
! If you make a slight turn.
! If there is a parallel road.
! If there is another road very nearby, such
as in the case of an elevated freeway.
! If you take a recently opened road that is
not on the map.
! If you drive in zigzags.
! If the road has a series of hairpin bends.
! If there is a loop or similar road configura-
tion.
! If you take a ferry.
! If you are driving on a long, straight road or
a gently curving road.
En
211
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
! If you are on a steep mountain road with
many height changes.
! If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.
! If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-
milar structure.
! If your vehicles wheels spin, such as on a
gravel road or in snow.
! If you put on chains, or change your tires
for ones with a different size.
! If trees or other obstacles block the GPS
signals for a considerable period.
! If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.
! If you join the road after driving around a
large parking lot.
! When you drive around a traffic circle.
! When starting driving immediately af ter
starting the engine.
En
212
Appendix
Appendix
Route setting information
Route search specifications
Your navigation system sets a route to your
destination by applying certain built-in rules to
the map data. This section provides some use-
ful information about how a route is set.
CAUTION
When a route is calculated, the route and voice
guidance for the route are automatically set.
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-
mation about traffic regulations applicable at the
time when the route was calculated is consid-
ered. One-way streets and street closures may
not be taken into consideration. For example, if a
street is open during the morning only, but you
arrive later, it would be against the traffic regula-
tions so you cannot drive along the set route.
When driving, please follow the actual traffic
signs. Also, the system may not know some traf-
fic regulations.
! The calculated route is one example of the
route to your destination decided by the na-
vigation system while taking the type of
streets or traffic regulations into account. It
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In
some cases, you may not be able to set the
streets you want to take. If you need to take
a certain street, set a waypoint on that
street.)
! If the destination is too far, there may be in-
stances where the route cannot be set. (If
you want to set a long-distance route going
across several areas, set waypoints along
the way.)
! During voice guidance, turns and intersec-
tions from the freeway are announced.
However, if you pass intersections, turns,
and other guidance points in rapid succes-
sion, some may delay or not be announced.
! It is possible that guidance may direct you
off a freeway and then back on again.
! In some cases, the route may require you
to travel in the opposite direction to your
current heading. In such cases, you are in-
structed to turn around, so please turn
around safely by following the actual traffic
rules.
! In some cases, a route may begin on the
opposite side of a railway or river from your
actual current location. If this happens,
drive towards your destination for a while,
and try route calculation again.
! When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a
detour route may not be suggested if driv-
ing through the traffic congestion would
still be better than taking the detour.
! There may be instances when the starting
point, the waypoint and the destination
point are not on the highlighted route.
! The number of traffic circle exits displayed
on the screen may differ from the actual
number of roads.
Route highlighting
! Once set, the route is highlighted in bright
color on the map.
! The immediate vicinity of your starting
point and destination may not be high-
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,
the route may appear to be cut off on the
display, but voice guidance will continue.
Auto reroute function
! If you deviate from the set route, the system
will re-calculate the route from that point
so that you remain on track to the destina-
tion.
! This function may not work under certain
conditions.
Handling and care of discs
Some basic precautions are necessary when
handling your discs.
En
213
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Built-in drive and care
! Use only conventional, fully circular discs.
Do not use shaped discs.
! Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or
otherwise damaged discs as they may da-
mage the built-in drive.
! When using discs that can be printed on
label surfaces, check the instructions and
the warnings of the discs. Depending on
the discs, inserting and ejecting may not
be possible. Using such discs may result in
damage to this equipment.
! Do not touch the recorded surface of the
discs.
! Store discs in their cases when not in use.
! Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-
onments including under direct sunlight.
! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-
micals to the surface of the discs.
! Do not attach commercially available labels
or other materials to the discs.
The discs may warp making the disc un-
playable.
The labels may come off during play-
back and prevent ejection of the discs,
which may result in damage to the
equipment.
! To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,
moving outward from the center.
! Condensation may temporarily impair the
built-in drives performance. Leave it to ad-
just to the warmer temperature for about
one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a
soft cloth.
! Playback of discs may not be possible be-
cause of disc characteristics, disc format,
recorded application, playback environ-
ment, storage conditions and so on.
! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.
! Read the precautions for discs before
using them.
Ambient conditions for playing
a disc
! At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-
ture cutout protects this product by switch-
ing it off automatically.
! Despite our careful design of the product,
small scratches that do not affect actual
operation may appear on the disc surface
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient
conditions for use or handling of the disc.
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this
product. Consider it to be normal wear and
tear.
Playable discs
DVD-Video and CD
DVD and CD discs that display the logos
shown below generally can be played on this
built-in DVD drive.
DVD-Video
CD
En
214
Appendix
Appendix
p is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
p It is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.
This DVD drive may not be able to play all
discs bearing the marks shown above.
AVCHD recorded discs
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.
Playing DualDisc
! DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a
recordable CD for audio on one side and a
recordable DVD for video on the other.
! Playback of the DVD side is possible with
this navigation system. However, since the
CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-
patible with the general CD standard, it
may not be possible to play the CD side
with this navigation system.
! Frequent loading and ejecting of a
DualDisc may result in scratches to the
disc.
! Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-
blems on this navigation system. In some
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in
the disc-loading slot and will not eject. To
prevent this, we recommend you refrain
from using DualDisc with this navigation
system.
! Please refer to the manufacturer for more
detailed information about DualDiscs.
Dolby Digital
This product will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-
nals internally and the sound will be output in
stereo.
p Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Detailed infor mation for
playable media
Compatibility
Common notes about disc compatibility
! Certain functions of this product may not
be available for some discs.
! Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-
teed.
! It is not possible to playback DVD-ROM/
DVD-RAM discs.
! Playback of discs may become impossible
with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-
peratures, or depending on the storage
conditions in the vehicle.
DVD-Video discs
! DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-
gion numbers cannot be played on this
DVD drive. The region number of the player
can be found on this products chassis.
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual
Layer) discs
! Unfinalized discs which have been re-
corded with the Video format (video mode)
cannot be played back.
! Discs which have been recorded with the
Video Recording format (VR mode) cannot
be played back.
! DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have
been recorded with Layer Jump recording
cannot be played back.
! For detailed information about recording
mode, please contact the manufacturer of
media, recorders, or writing software.
En
215
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
CD-R/CD-RW discs
! Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.
! It may not be possible to playback CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-
corder or a personal computer because of
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation
on the lens of the built-in drive.
! Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible, depending
on the recording device, writing software,
their settings, and other environmental fac-
tors.
! Please record with the correct format. (For
details, please contact manufacturer of
media, recorders, or writing software.)
! Titles and other text information recorded
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-
played by this product (in the case of audio
data (CD-DA)).
! Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW
discs before using them.
Common notes about the external
storage device (USB, SD)
! Do not leave the external storage device
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-
peratures.
! Depending on the kind of the external sto-
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-
tion system may not recognize the storage
device or files may not be played back prop-
erly.
! The text information of some audio and
video files may not be correctly displayed.
! File extensions must be used properly.
! There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of files on an external storage de-
vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-
chies.
! Operations may vary depending on the
kind of an external storage device (USB,
SD).
! It may not be possible to play some music
files from SD or USB because of file char-
acteristics, file format, recorded applica-
tion, playback environment, storage
conditions, and so on.
USB storage device compatibility
= For details about USB storage device com-
patibility with this navigation system, refer
to Specifications on page 235.
! Protocol: bulk
! You cannot connect a USB storage device
to this navigation system via a USB hub.
! Partitioned USB storage device is not com-
patible with this navigation system.
! Firmly secure the USB storage device when
driving. Do not let the USB storage device
fall onto the floor, where it may become
jammed under the brake or gas pedal.
! There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files encoded with image
data.
! Some USB storage devices connected to
this navigation system may generate noise
on the radio.
! Do not connect anything other than the
USB storage device.
The sequence of audio files on USB sto-
rage device
For USB storage device, the sequence is differ-
ent from that of USB storage device.
SD memory card and SDHC memory card
= For details about SD memory card compat-
ibility with this navigation system, refer to
Specifications on page 235.
Handling guidelines and
supplemental information
! This system is not compatible with Multi
Media Card (MMC).
! Copyright protected files cannot be played
back.
En
216
Appendix
Appendix
Notes specific to DivX files
! Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-
ner sites are guaranteed for proper opera-
tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not
operate properly.
! DRM rental files cannot be operated until
playing back is started.
! The navigation system corresponds to a
DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43
seconds. Search operations beyond this
time limit are prohibited.
! DivX VOD file playback requires supplying
the ID code of this navigation system to the
DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,
refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registra-
tion code on page 182.
! Plays all versions of DivX video, except for
DivX 7 with standard playback of DivX
media files.
! For more details about DivX, visit the follow-
ing site:
http://www.divx.com/
DivX subtitle files
! Srt format subtitle files with the extension
.srt can be used.
! Only one subtitle file can be used for each
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be
associated.
! Subtitle files that are named with the same
character string as the DivX file before the
extension are associated with the DivX file.
The character strings before the extension
must be exactly the same. However, if there
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in
a single folder, the files are associated even
if the file names are not the same.
! The subtitle file must be stored in the same
folder as the DivX file.
! Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any
more subtitle files will not be recognized.
! Up to 64 characters can be used for the
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-
tension. If more than 64 characters are
used for the file name, the subtitle file may
not be recognized.
! The character code for the subtitle file
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the
characters to be displayed incorrectly.
! The subtitles may not be displayed correctly
if the displayed characters in the subtitle
file include control code.
! For materials that use a high transfer rate,
the subtitles and video may not be comple-
tely synchronized.
! If multiple subtitles are programed to dis-
play within a very short time frame, such as
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-
played at the correct time.
En
217
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Media compatibility chart
General
Media CD-R/-RW
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
SD memory card
File system
ISO9660 level 1,
ISO9660 level 2,
Romeo and Joliet
ISO9660 level 1,
ISO9660 level 2,
Romeo, Joliet
and UDF 1.02
FAT16/FAT32
Maximum number of
folders
700 300
Maximum number of
files
999 3 500 2 500
Playable file types MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAVE, H.264, MPEG4,
WMV
Note:
Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the external storage device (USB, SD): 7.5 h (450 minutes)
MP3 compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
SD memory card
File extension .mp3
Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
Sampling frequency
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
for emphasis)
8 kHz to 48 kHz
ID3 tag ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4
Notes:
! Ver. 2.x of ID3 tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.
! The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist
En
218
Appendix
Appendix
WMA compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
SD memory card
File extension .wma
Bit rate 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
Sampling frequency 8kHz to 48 kHz
Note:
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
Windows Media
Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice
WAV compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
SD memory card
File extension
WAV files on the CD-R/-RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL cannot be played.
.wav
Format Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM
Sampling frequency
LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz
IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and 44.1 kHz
Quantization bits
LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits
MS ADPCM: 4 bits
Note:
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.
AAC compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
SD memory card
File extension .m4a
Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)
Sampling frequency 8kHz to 44.1 kHz 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Note:
The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.
En
219
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
DivX compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
DVD-R/-RW/-R
DL
USB storage de-
vice
SD memory card
File extension .avi/.divx
DivX files on the external storage device
(USB, SD) cannot be played.
Profile (DivX version)
Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/Ver. 5.x/
Ver. 6.x
Compatible audio codec MP3, Dolby Digital
Bit rate (MP3) 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
Sampling frequency
(MP3)
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
for emphasis)
Maximum image size 720 pixels × 576 pixels
Maximum file size 4 GB
Notes:
! The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec
! Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight
delay in the start of playback on discs.
! If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.
! Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.
! Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and
10.08 Mbps for DVDs.
En
220
Appendix
Appendix
Video files compatibility (USB, SD)
File extension .avi .mp4, .m4v .wmv
Format MPEG-4 MPEG-4 H.264 WMV
Compatible video codec MPEG-4 MPEG-4 H.264 WMV
Compatible audio codec
Linear PCM
(LPCM), IMA-
ADPCM
MP3
AAC AAC WMA
Recommended
video specifica-
tions
Image size: QVGA
(320 pixels x 240
pixels)
Bit rate:
768 kbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate:
768 kbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate:
384 kbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate:
384 kbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Maximum bit rate:
Image size:
WQVGA
(400 pixels x 240
pixels)
Bit rate: 2 Mbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate: 2 Mbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate: 1 Mbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate:
768 kbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Image size: VGA
(640 pixels x 480
pixels)
Bit rate: 1 Mbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate: 1 Mbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate:
576 kbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Bit rate:
576 kbps
Frame rate:
30 fps
Maximum file size 2 GB
Maximum playback time 150 minutes
Common notes
! The navigation system may not operate cor-
rectly, depending on the application used
to encode WMA files.
! Depending on the version of Windows
Media
Player used to encode WMA files,
album names and other text information
may not be correctly displayed.
! There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files encoded with image
data.
! The navigation system is not compatible
with packet write data transfer.
! This navigation system can recognize up to
32 characters, beginning with the first char-
acter, including extension for the file and
folder name. Depending on the display
area, the navigation system may try to dis-
play them with a reduced font size. How-
ever, the maximum number of the
characters that you can display varies ac-
cording to the width of each character, and
of the display area.
! Folder selection sequence or other opera-
tions may be altered, depending on the en-
coding or writing software.
! Regardless of the length of blank section
between the songs of original recording,
compressed audio discs play with a short
pause between songs.
En
221
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Example of a hierarchy
The following figure is an example of the tier
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers
are assigned and the order to be played back.
: Folder
:File
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
e
v
e
l 1 L
e
v
e
l 2 L
e
v
e
l 3 L
e
v
e
l 4
Notes
! This product assigns folder numbers. The user
cannot assign folder numbers.
! If there is a folder that does not contain any
playable file, the folder itself will display in the
folder list but you cannot check any files in
the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,
these folders will be skipped without display-
ing the folder number.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-
nectivity technology that is developed as a
cable replacement for cellular phones, hand-
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits
voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per
second. Bluetooth was launched by a special
interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc.,
Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in
1998, and it is currently developed by nearly
2 000 companies worldwide.
! The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are re-
gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
PIONEER CORPORATION is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
About the SAT RADIO
READY Logo
The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the
Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold
separately) can be controlled by this naviga-
tion system. Please inquire with your dealer or
nearest authorized Pioneer service station re-
garding the satellite radio tuner that can be
connected to this navigation system.
Note:
Everything worth listening to is on SiriusXM,
getting over 130 channels, including the most
commercial-free music, plus the best sports,
news, talk and entertainment.
Sirius, XM, SAT Radio Ready and all related
logos and marks are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio, Inc. All rights reserved.
HD Radio
Technology
! AVIC-Z140BH
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation.
U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio
and
the HD, HD Radio, and Arc logos are pro-
prietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
En
222
Appendix
Appendix
SD and SDHC logo
SD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
microSD Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C,
LLC.
WMA/WMV
Windows Media is either a registered trade-
mark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
p This product includes technology owned by
Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used
or distributed without a license from
Microsoft Licensing, Inc.
DivX
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-
ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, LLC, a
subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This unit can
play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/
ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the
same terminology as DVD video, individual
DivX video files are called Titles. Keep in
mind that when naming flies/titles on a CD-R/
RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, they
will by played in written order by default.
p DivX
®
, DivX Certified
®
and associated logos
are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its
subsidiaries and are used under license.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX
®
is a digital
video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary
of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified
®
device that plays DivX video. Visit
divx.com for more information and software
tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This
DivX Certified
®
device must be registered in
order to play purchased DivX Video-on-De-
mand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registra-
tion code, locate the DivX VOD section in
Displaying your DivX VOD registration code.Go
to vod.divx.com for more information on how
to complete your registration.
= For details, refer to Displaying your DivX
VOD registration code on page 182.
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-
eral applications can be used to encode AAC
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-
pending on the application which is used to
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-
coded by iTunes.
Android
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
En
223
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
BlackBerry
®
The Trademark BlackBerry
®
is owned by
Research In Motion Limited and is regis-
tered in the United States and may be
pending or registered in other countries.
PIONEER CORPORATION is not en-
dorsed, sponsored, affiliated with or other-
wise authorized by
Research In Motion Limited.
Detailed infor mation
regarding connected iPod
devices
CAUTION
! Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost
from an iPod, even if that data is lost while
using the navigation system. Please back up
your iPod data regularly.
! Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-
tion due to the resulting high temperature.
! Do not leave the iPod in any location with
high temperatures.
! Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.
For details, refer to the iPod manuals.
iPod and iPhone
Made for iPod and Made for iPhone mean
that an electronic accessory has been de-
signed to connect specifically to iPod or
iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod or iPhone may affect wireless perfor-
mance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the U.S. and other countries.
iTunes
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
Using app-based connected
content
IMPORTANT
Requirements to access app-based connected
content services such as Pandora internet radio
and Aha Radio using the Pioneer navigation sys-
tem:
! Latest version of the Pioneer compatible con-
nected content application(s) for the smart-
phone, available from the service provider,
downloaded to your smartphone.
! A current account with the content service
provider.
! Smartphone Data Plan.
Note: if the Data Plan for your smartphone
does not provide for unlimited data usage, ad-
ditional charges from your carrier may apply
for accessing app-based connected content
via 3G and/or EDGE networks.
! Connection to the Internet via 3G, EDGE or
Wi-Fi network.
! Optional Pioneer adapter cable connecting
your iPhone to the Pioneer navigation system.
Limitations:
! Access to app-based connected content will
depend on the availability of cellular and/or
Wi-Fi network coverage for the purpose of al-
lowing your smartphone to connect to the In-
ternet.
En
224
Appendix
Appendix
! Service availability may be geographically lim-
ited to the region. Consult the connected con-
tent service provider for additional
information.
! Ability of this product to access connected
content is subject to change without notice
and could be affected by any of the following:
compatibility issues with future firmware ver-
sions of smartphone; compatibility issues with
future versions of the connected content ap-
plication(s) for the smartphone; changes to or
discontinuation of the connected Content ap-
plication(s) or service by its provider.
Pandora
®
internet
Pandora is a registered trademark of Pandora
Media, Inc.
Aha Radio
Aha, Aha Radio and the Aha and Aha Radio
logos are either the trademarks or the regis-
tered trademarks of Harman International In-
dustries, Incorporated.
Using the LCD screen correctly
Handling the LCD screen
! When the LCD screen is subjected to direct
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-
come very hot, resulting in possible da-
mage to the LCD screen. When not using
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to
direct sunlight as much as possible.
! The LCD screen should be used within the
temperature ranges shown in Specifica-
tions.
! Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures
higher or lower than the operating tem-
perature range, because the LCD screen
may not operate normally and could be da-
maged.
! The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-
crease its visibility within the vehicle.
Please do not press strongly on it as this
may damage it.
! Do not push the LCD screen with excessive
force as this may scratch it.
! Never touch the LCD screen with anything
besides your finger when operating the
touch panel functions. The LCD screen can
scratch easily.
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen
! If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air
conditioner, make sure that air from the air
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from
the heater may break the LCD screen, and
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-
sulting in possible damage.
! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)
may appear on the LCD screen. These are
due to the characteristics of the LCD
screen and do not indicate a malfunction.
! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is
exposed to direct sunlight.
! When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the
video in the form of disturbances such as
spots or colored stripes.
Maintaining the LCD screen
! When removing dust from the LCD screen
or cleaning it, first turn the system power
off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
! When wiping the LCD screen, take care not
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or
abrasive chemical cleaners.
En
225
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
LED (light-emitting diode)
backlight
A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-
play to illuminate the LCD screen.
! At low temperatures, using the LED back-
light may increase image lag and degrade
the image quality because of the character-
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will
improve with an increase in temperature.
! The product lifetime of the LED backlight is
more than 10 000 hours. However, it may
decrease if used in high temperatures.
! If the LED backlight reaches the end of its
product lifetime, the screen will become
dimmer and the image will no longer be
visible. In that case, please consult your
dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer
Ser vice Station.
En
226
Appendix
Appendix
Display information
Destination Menu
Page
Address 38
Return Home 40
POI
Gas Station
41
Bank
Coffee
Hotel
Spell Name 41
Near Me 41
Near Destination 42
Around City 42
AVIC FEEDS 43
Favorites 43, 50
History 44, 53
Cancel Route 49
Traffic 54
Coordinates 44
Route Overview 46
Phone Menu
Page
Dial Pad 64
Call Home 65
Contacts 65
Contacts Transfer 68
Received Calls 66
Dialed Calls 66
Missed Calls 66
En
227
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Settings Menu
Page
Navi Settings 158
System Settings 171
AV Settings 178
AV Sound 182
Map Settings 164
Bluetooth Settings 69
Setting Replicator 189
Navi Settings menu
Page
Connection Status 158
3D Calibration Status 159
Gas Mileage 160
Drive Log Settings 162
Demo Mode 162
Set Home 163
Modify Current Location 163
Eco Settings 163
En
228
Appendix
Appendix
System Settings menu
Page
Regional Settings
Program Language
Voice Language
172
Time 172
km / mile 172
Average Speed 173
Volume 173
Splash Screen 174
Back Camera 175
Screen Calibration 175
Illumi Color 176
Service Information 176
Restore Factory Settings 197
Map Settings menu
Page
Displayed Info
Close Up View 165
City Map 165
City Map Barrier 165
Show Traffic Incident 166
Bluetooth Connected 166
Current Street Name 166
Favorites Icon 167
3D Land Mark 167
Show Maneuver 167
Show Eco Meter 168
Quick Access Selection 170
Overlay POI 168
View Mode 34
Day/Night Display 169
AV Guide Mode 170
Road Color 170
En
229
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Bluetooth Settings menu
Page
Connection 62
Registration 59
Device Name 69
Password 70
Bluetooth On/Off 70
Echo Cancel 70
Page
Auto Answer Preference 70
Refuse All Calls 71
Sort Order 69
Clear Memory 71
Firmware update 72
AV System Settings menu
Page
AV1 Input 178
AV2 Input 179
Wide Mode 179
Auto EQ Meas. 185
App Connection 133
Mute 180
Mute Level 180
Rear SP 180
DivX® VOD 182
VR Catalog Menu 181
En
230
Appendix
Appendix
AV Sound Settings menu
Page
FAD/BAL (Balance) 183
EQ 183
Loudness 187
Sub Woofer 188
HPF 188
SLA 188
Bass Booster 189
Sonic Center Control 187
En
231
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Glossary
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.
Aspect ratio
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional
presence and atmosphere.
Bit rate
This expresses data volume per second, or bps
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,
the more information is available to reproduce
the sound. Using the same encoding method
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better
the sound.
Built-in sensor
The built-in sensor that enables the system to
estimate your vehicles position.
CD-DA
This stands for a general music CD (commer-
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this
word is sometime used for a distinction be-
tween data CDs (which include compressed
audio files) and general music CDs.
Chapter
Titles of DVD-Video are in turn divided into
chapters which are numbered in the same
way as the chapters of a book. With discs fea-
turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired
scene with chapter search.
Current location
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-
angle mark.
Destination
A location you choose as the end point of your
journey.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by
DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.
DivX media files contain highly compressed
video with high visual quality that maintains a
relatively small file size. DivX files can also in-
clude advanced media features like menus,
subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many
DivX media files are available for download on-
line, and you can create your own using your
personal content and easy-to-use tools from
DivX.com.
DivX Certified
®
DivX Certified
®
products are officially tested by
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all
versions of DivX video, except for DivX 7.
Favorites
A frequently visited location (such as your
workplace or a relatives home) that you can
register to allow easy routing.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-
ety of purposes.
Guidance point
These are important landmarks along your
route, generally intersections. The next gui-
dance point along your route is indicated on
the map by the yellow flag icon.
Home location
Your registered home location.
ID3 tag
This is a method of embedding track-related
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-
formation can include the track title, the ar-
tists name, the album title, the music genre,
the year of production, comments and other
data. The contents can be freely edited using
software with ID3 tag editing functions.
Although the tags are restricted by the num-
ber of characters, the information can be
viewed when the track is played back.
En
232
Appendix
Appendix
ISO 9660 format
This is the international standard for the for-
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations
for the following two levels:
! Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name
consists of up to eight characters, half-byte
English capital letters, half-byte numerals
and the _ sign, with a file-extension of
three characters).
! Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters
(including the separation mark . and a file
extension). Each folder contains less than
eight hierarchies.
! Extended formats
Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
JPEG
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts
Group, and is an international still image com-
pression standard.
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an
audio compression standard established by a
working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-
tional Organization for Standardization). MP3
is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th
the size of a conventional disc.
MPEG
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts
Group, and is an international video image
compression standard.
Multi-angle
With regular TV programs, although multiple
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot
scenes, only images from one camera at a
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple
tracks. For example, dialog in up to eight lan-
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-
deo, letting you choose the language as
desired.
Multi-session
Multi-session is a recording method that al-
lows additional data to be recorded later.
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-
sion is a method of recording more than two
sessions in one disc.
Multi-subtitle
For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages
can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting
you choose as desired.
Packet write
This is a general term for a method of writing
individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-
quired, just as is done with files on floppy or
hard disks.
Parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-
vents children from viewing such scenes. With
this kind of disc, if you set the units parental
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for
children will be disabled, or these scenes will
be skipped.
Phone book
An address book on users phone is collec-
tively referr ed to as Phone book. Depending
on the cellular phone, the phone book may be
called a name such as Contacts, Business
card or something else.
Point Of Interest (POI)
Any of a range of locations stored in the data,
such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,
and amusement parks.
En
233
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
Region number
DVD players and DVD discs feature region
numbers indicating the area in which they
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-
sible unless it features the same region num-
ber as the DVD player.
Route setting
The process of determining the ideal route to a
specific location; route setting is done auto-
matically by the system when you specify a
destination.
Set route
The route marked out by the system to your
destination. It is highlighted in bright color on
the map.
Title
DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, en-
abling recording of multiple videos on a single
disc. If, for example, one disc contains three
separate videos, they are divided into title 1,
title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the conve-
nience of title search and other functions.
Track log
Your navigation system logs routes that you al-
ready passed through if the track logger is ac-
tivated. This recorded route is called a track
log. It is handy when you want to check a
route traveled or if returning along a complex
route.
VBR
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally
speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit
rate according to the needs of audio compres-
sion, it is possible to produce compression-
priority data.
Voice guidance
The giving of directions by navigation voice
while in guidance.
Waypoint
A location that you choose to visit before your
destination; a journey can be built up from
multiple waypoints and the destination.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media
Audio and
refers to an audio compression technology
that is developed by Microsof t Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded by using Windows
Media Player version 7 or later.
En
234
Appendix
Appendix
Specifications
General
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC
(allowable voltage range:
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)
Grounding system ................... Negative type
Maximum current consumption
........................................... 10.0 A
Dimensions (W × H × D):
AVIC-Z140BH
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×
165 mm
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)
Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 20 mm
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×
3/4 in.)
AVIC-X940BT
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×
165 mm
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)
Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 12 mm
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×
1/2 in.)
Weight:
AVIC-Z140BH ................... 2.14 kg (4.7 lbs)
AVIC-X940BT .................... 1.87 kg (4.1 lbs)
NAND flash memory ............. 4GB
Navigation
GPS receiver:
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS
SPS (Standard Positioning
Service)
Reception system .......... 32-channel multi-channel
reception system
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz
Sensitivity .......................... 140 dBm (typ)
Position update frequency
........................................... Approx. once per second
GPS antenna:
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/
right-handed helical polari-
zation
Antenna cable ................. 3.55 m (11 ft. 7 in.)
Dimensions (W × H × D)
........................................... 33 mm × 14.7 mm × 36 mm
(1-1/4 in. × 4/7 in. ×
1-3/8 in.)
Weight ................................ 73.7 g (0.211 lbs)
Display
Screen size/aspect ratio:
AVIC-Z140BH ................... 7 inch wide/16:9
AVIC-X940BT .................... 6.1 inch wide/16:9
Effective display area:
AVIC-Z140BH ................... 156.6 mm × 81.6 mm
AVIC-X940BT .................... 136.2 mm × 72 mm
Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)
Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving
Backlight ..................................... LED
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible
Tolerable temperature range:
Power on ............................ +14 °F to +140 °F
Power off ............................ 4 °F to +176 °F
Angle adjustment
AVIC-Z140BH ................... to 22°
AVIC-X940BT ....................
Audio
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4
50 W × 2 ch/4 W +70
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,
5 %THD, 4 W LOAD, Both
Channels Driven)
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]
allowable)
Preout output level (max):
AVIC-Z140BH ................... 4.0 V
AVIC-X940BT .................... 2.2 V
Preout impedan ce:
AVIC-Z140BH ................... 100 W
AVIC-X940BT .................... 1kW
Equalizer (8-Band Graphic Equalizer):
Frequency .......................... 40 Hz/80 Hz/200 Hz/400 Hz/
1 kHz/2.5 kHz/8 kHz/10 kHz
Gain ...................................... ±12 dB
Loudness contour:
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB
(10 kHz)
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB
(10 kHz)
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB
(10 kHz)
(volume: 30 dB)
HPF:
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/
125 Hz
Slope .................................... 12 dB/oct
Subwoofer:
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/
125 Hz
Slope .................................... 18 dB/oct
Gain ...................................... 24/+6 dB
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse
Bass boost:
Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB
En
235
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
DVD Drive
System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,
AAC, DivX system
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, DVD-R(DL),
DVD-RW, CD-ROM, CD-DA,
CD-R/RW
Region number ........................ 1
Signal format:
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz
Number of quantization bits
........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,
at sampling frequency
96 kHz)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-
work)
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A
network))
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB
(1 kHz))
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)
Output level:
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W (±0.2 V)
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer
3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver. 7, 8 & 9
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded
by iTunes):
.m4a
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,
Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :
.avi, .divx
USB
USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed
Max current supply ................. 1A
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32
USB class .................................... Mass storage class
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/
H.264/MPEG4/WMV
SD (AVIC-Z140BH)
SD memory card, SDHC memory card
Compatible physical format
........................................... Version 2.00
File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32
Decoding format ............ MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/
H.264/MPEG4/WMV
SD (AVIC-X940BT)
microSD card, microSDHC card
Compatible physical format
........................................... Version 2.00
File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32
Decoding format ............ MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/
H.264/MPEG4/WMV
Bluetooth
Version .......................................... Bluetooth 2.0+EDR
Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.
(Power class 2)
FM tuner
AVIC-Z140BH
Frequency range ............ 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Usable sensitivity ........... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,
S/N: 30 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 80 dB (digital broadcasting)
(IHF-A network)
72 dB (analog broadcasting)
(IHF-A network)
Distortion ........................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
stereo)
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
mono)
Frequency response ..... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz (±3 dB)
Stereo separation .......... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)
AVIC-X940BT
Frequency range ............ 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Usable sensitivity ........... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,
S/N: 30 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 72 dB (IHF-A network)
Distortion ........................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
stereo)
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
mono)
Frequency response ..... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz (±3 dB)
Stereo separation .......... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)
AM tuner
AVIC-Z140BH
Frequency range ............ 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
(10 kHz)
Usable sensitivity ........... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 80 dB (digital broadcasting)
(IHF-A network)
62 dB (analog broadcasting)
(IHF-A network)
AVIC-X940BT
Frequency range ............ 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
(10 kHz)
Usable sensitivity ........... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ..... 62 dB (IHF-A network)
En
236
Appendix
Appendix
Traffic tuner (AVIC-Z140BH)
Rated power source ............... 13.8 V DC
(allowable voltage range:
10.0 V to 14.5 V DC)
Grounding system ................... Negative type
Maximum current consumption
........................................... 60 mA
Dimensions (W × H × D) ... 68 mm × 49 mm × 19 mm
(2-5/8 in. × 1-7/8 in. ×
3/4 in.)
Weight .......................................... 180 g (0.397 lbs)
CEA2006 Specifications
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels
(4 W and 1 % THD+N)
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into
4 W)
Note
Specifications and design are subject to possible
modifications without notice due to im-
provements.
En
237
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix
En
238
En
239
PIONEER CORPORATION
1-1, Shin-ogura, Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi,
Kanagawa 212-0031, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
5 Arco Lane, Heatherton, Victoria, 3202, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
340 Ferrier Street, Unit 2, Markham, Ontario L3R 2Z5, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
TEL: 905-479-4411
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL: 55-9178-4270
台北4078
: 886-(0)2-2657-3588
9095
: 852-2848-6488
© 2011-2012 PIONEER CORPORATION.
All rights reserved.
<CRB3841-B> UC
<KYTZX> <12B00000>
137

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Pioneer AVIC-Z140BH wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info